JP2012183422A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To easily attach and detach a game frame to and from a game board.SOLUTION: A board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided on the game board, and a plurality of frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuits are provided in the game frame. The board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the plurality of frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuits, or a performance control means and the plurality of frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuits are connected via wiring of one system. Also, the game frame includes a game-frame-side junction board for relaying the connection between the plurality of frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuits and the performance control means, and one connector removably connects a signal line of a control signal to the plurality of frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuits output in a serial signal system by an output means to the game-frame-side junction board.

Description

  The present invention includes a game frame that can be opened and closed with respect to an outer frame, and a game board that is attached to the game frame and includes a predetermined plate-like body and various parts that are attached to the plate-like body. It relates to exchangeable gaming machines.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, which is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device. Some are configured to be controllable to a specific gaming state.

  The specific game state means a state advantageous for a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the specific game state is, for example, a state in which a special variable winning device is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball (a big hit game state), or a state in which a right to be advantageous for a player has occurred. In this state, a predetermined game value such as a state where conditions for paying out premium game media are easily established is given.

  In such a gaming machine, the fact that the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as identification information is a combination of specific display modes (specific display result) determined in advance is generally referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the V zone provided in the big prize opening) is not established at the time when the big prize opening is closed, the big hit gaming state is ended.

  In addition, if a special condition such as a display result of variable display of identification information becomes a special specific display result (special display result) of the specific display results in the variable display device, the jackpot is subsequently obtained. Some are configured to shift to a high-probability state (also referred to as a probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the occurrence is high.

  Some of such gaming machines have a built-in real-time clock (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2).

JP 2004-357726 A (paragraphs 0078-0080, paragraphs 0090-0094, FIG. 8, FIG. 10) JP 2003-225410 A (paragraph 0051, paragraph 0080, paragraph 0268-0270, FIG. 11)

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily attaching and detaching a game frame and a game board.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming frame installed to be openable and closable with respect to an outer frame, a gaming board that is attached to the gaming frame and includes a predetermined plate-like body and various components that are attached to the plate-like body, A gaming machine in which a game board can be exchanged, and a timing means for performing a timing operation so that at least one of day and time can be specified, and control of the progress of the game and control of electric parts for production The game control means for transmitting the effect control command, and the effect control means for controlling the electric parts for the effect according to the effect control command transmitted by the game control means, the game control means and the effect control means are: The game control means includes command transmission means for transmitting an effect control command to the effect control means, and the effect control means is used for the effect based on the effect control command received from the game control means. The output means for outputting a control signal for controlling the air component in a serial signal system, the game effect executing means for executing the game effect using the electric parts for effect, and the time measurement result by the time measuring means satisfy a predetermined condition And a game-side serial-parallel conversion circuit and a game frame provided on the game board, wherein the game-effect execution means for changing the game effect executed by the game effect execution means to a game effect of a predetermined effect mode. The board side serial-parallel conversion circuit further converts the control signal input from the output means of the effect control means from the serial signal system to the parallel signal system. , Output to the electrical parts provided on the game board among the electrical parts for production, the plurality of frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit is the output means of the production control means An input control signal is converted from a serial signal system to a parallel signal system, and is output to an electrical part provided in a game frame among the electrical parts for production. A board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit and a plurality of The frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit or the effect control means and the plurality of frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuits are connected through one system wiring, and the connection between the plurality of frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuits and the effect control means. A game frame side relay board that relays the game signal is provided in the game frame, and the signal line of the control signal to the plurality of frame side serial-parallel conversion circuits output by the output means by the serial signal system is connected to the game frame side relay board. The connector is detachably connected using two connectors.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, it is possible to easily attach and detach the game frame and the game board.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a front view which shows the front of a game frame. It is a front view which shows the front of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the game frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the back surface of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a payout control board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate and an effect control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a real-time clock. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of an information terminal board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the output port in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the input port in the microcomputer for game control. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control board, a relay board, a board side IC board, and a frame side IC board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the format of the serial data output from the microcomputer for production control. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of the input timing of the serial data and clock signal to serial-parallel conversion IC, and the output timing of parallel data. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the EXT data of an input port data designation | designated command. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening opening post-process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the payout control signal. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line etc. which are used for transmission / reception of a payout control signal. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of how to output a payout control signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the state of the detection signal of a payout number count switch, and the output state of a prize ball count signal. It is a flowchart which shows an input port data confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows production control command control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of bit allocation of the output port in the microcomputer for payout control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of bit allocation of the input port in the microcomputer for payout control. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control process which the microcomputer for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball lending control process. It is a flowchart which shows the payout start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a payout motor stop waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the kind of error, and the display of LED for an error display. It is a flowchart which shows an error process. It is a flowchart which shows an error process. It is a flowchart which shows an input determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a connection in the case of connecting an external device and performing the setting process of a real-time clock. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the setting command which a real-time clock setting apparatus outputs. It is a flowchart which shows a door opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of 1 structure of a process table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of 1 structure of the process table for common effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of 1 structure of the process table for specific productions. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the control content of the lamp performed according to process data, when each presentation control command is received. It is a flowchart which shows a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows a round post-process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the aspect of the various alerting | reporting performed in alerting | reporting control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows alerting | reporting control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a notification start process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the process during alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the process during alerting | reporting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the process table for alerting | reporting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the lamp control signal output as a serial data system in alerting | reporting control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a serial setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows one structural example of the data storage area | region where the lamp control signal and motor control signal of an output object are set. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a serial input / output process. It is a timing chart showing the effect execution timing of the decorative pattern variation display. It is a timing chart showing the effect execution timing of the decorative pattern variation display. Furthermore, it is a flowchart which shows the example of the decoration design change start process in the case of switching to the display display of the design change of the design by specific effect at the time of probability change on condition that operation by the player is performed. Furthermore, it is a flowchart which shows the example of the process during decoration design change in the case of switching to the display change of the decoration design by specific effect at the time of a probability change on condition that operation by the player was performed. It is a block diagram which shows the example of a connection of a main board | substrate, a payout control board, an effect control board, and an information terminal board. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration design change start process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration pattern change process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration pattern change process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol fluctuation | variation stop process in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which multiple game machines are installed in the game store. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the aspect in the case of producing a specific effect simultaneously in the some game machine 1 installed in a game store.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the front of the game frame 11. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the front of the game board. In the following embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine. FIG. 2 also shows an enlarged view of the hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) 3 in the front surface of the game frame 11.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame 11 attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. The game frame 11 is a front frame (not shown) that is installed so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (excluding game boards to be described later). ).

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 capable of storing game balls paid out from the payout device 97. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receiving tray (lower plate) 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for launching the game balls are provided. . On the back surface of the glass door frame 2, as shown in FIG. 3, there is a plastic frame (plastic frame) that constitutes a part of the game frame 11. The plastic frame includes a mechanism plate, and components such as a power supply circuit (not shown) and a speaker 27 are attached to the mechanism plate. The plastic frame in the game frame 11 is provided with a relay board 607 that relays the wiring between the game frame 11 and the game board 6. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 6 is attached to the front frame of the game frame 11 so that attachment or detachment is possible. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. A game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6.

  Near the center of the game area 7, there is provided a variable display device (image display device) 9 including a plurality of variable display portions each variably displaying a decorative pattern for performance. The variable display device 9 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The variable display device 9 performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) during the variable symbol display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8. The variable display device 9 that performs variable display of decorative symbols is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  Below the variable display device 9, there is provided a special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8 for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying a number of, for example, 00 to 99. Note that the special symbol display 8 is not limited to displaying a two-digit number, and may be configured to variably display a number of other digits such as 0 to 9. In addition, the variable display device 9 performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (for production) during the variable symbol display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8.

  On the right side of the special symbol display 8 is a special symbol hold composed of four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the start winning openings 13, 14, that is, the number of hold memories (also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). A storage indicator 18 is provided. Every time there is an effective start prize, the display color of one display is changed. Each time the variable display on the special symbol display 8 is started, the display color of one display is restored. In the display area of the variable display device 9, a special symbol reserved storage display area including four display areas for displaying the number of reserved memories may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is 4, but the upper limit value may be a larger value. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  A first start winning opening 13 is provided below the variable display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a. In addition, on the left side of the variable display device 9, a variable winning device 15 that forms a second start winning port 14 is provided. The winning ball that has entered the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the game frame 11 is opened. As shown in FIG. 4, four substrates (frame side IC substrates) 602 to 605 for mounting ICs and the like are attached to the back surface on the game frame 11 side. A frame-side IC board 602 attached to the upper part of the game frame 11 is mounted with serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 and 612 for converting serial data into parallel data. Control signals are supplied from the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 and 612 to the LEDs 281a to 281l (hereinafter referred to as the ceiling lamps 281a to 281l or the frame lamps 281a to 281l) constituting the ceiling lamp. Here, “lamp” and “LED” are used synonymously, but a light emitter other than LED may be used as each lamp.

  In addition, a frame-side IC substrate 603 attached to the right side (left side when viewed from the back side) of the game frame 11 is mounted with a serial-parallel conversion IC 613. From the serial-parallel conversion IC 613, the LEDs 283a to 283e constituting the right frame lamp (hereinafter referred to as the right frame lamps 283a to 283e or the frame lamps 283a to 283e) and the right prize ball flashing when the prize ball is paid out. A control signal is supplied to an LED (hereinafter referred to as a right award ball lamp) 51b. A serial-parallel conversion IC 614 is mounted on the frame-side IC board 604 attached to the left side (right side as viewed from the back side) of the game frame 11. From the serial-parallel conversion IC 614, the LEDs 282a to 282e (hereinafter referred to as the left frame lamps 282a to 282e or the frame lamps 282a to 282e) constituting the left frame lamp and the left prize ball flashing when the prize ball is paid out. A control signal is supplied to an LED (hereinafter referred to as a left prize ball lamp) 51a. Hereinafter, the left prize ball lamp 51a and the right prize ball lamp 51b may be collectively referred to as a prize ball lamp.

  The frame side IC board 605 attached to the lower part of the game frame 11 is mounted with a serial-parallel conversion IC 615 and an input IC 620 for converting parallel data into serial data. From the serial-parallel conversion IC 615, an LED 83 (hereinafter referred to as a lamp 83) that constitutes an operation button lamp provided on the operation buttons 81a to 81e and an LED 82a to 82d (a lamp 83 provided on the hitting ball supply tray 3). Hereinafter, control signals are supplied to the lamps 82a to 82d. In addition, detection signals from the operation buttons 81a to 81e are input to the input IC 620 in parallel. In addition, the figure which looked at the frame side IC board | substrate 605 from the side is also shown by FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, the frame side IC substrate 602 attached to the upper part of the game frame among the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 is equipped with two serial-parallel conversion ICs. It is configured as a collective substrate. With such a configuration, it is possible to consolidate boards on which serial-parallel conversion ICs are mounted, and it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the gaming machine.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a relay board 607 is attached to the game frame 11 side. The wiring from the relay substrate 607 is connected to the frame side IC substrate 604, connected from the frame side IC substrate 604 to the frame side IC substrate 602, and further connected from the frame side IC substrate 602 to the frame side IC substrate 603. Further, the wiring from the relay substrate 607 is connected to the frame side substrate 605. Further, the wiring between the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604 and the wiring between the frame side IC substrates 604 and 605 and the relay substrate 607 are performed using connectors 156a to 156h on each substrate as shown in FIG. Connected. FIG. 4 shows a configuration in which wiring connection is made using a type of connector that connects to the board in the vertical direction. For example, a type of connector that connects to the board in the horizontal direction is used. Wire connection may be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the wiring from the connector 156 a of the relay board 607 is connected to the connector 156 b of the frame side IC board 604. The wiring pattern of the frame side IC substrate 604 is further branched from the connector 156b, one is connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614, and the other is connected to the connector 156c. Further, in the frame side IC substrate 604, the connector 156c is arranged at an end portion on the frame side IC substrate 602 side. The wiring from the connector 156c of the frame side IC substrate 604 is connected to the connector 156d of the frame side IC substrate 602. The wiring pattern of the frame side IC substrate 602 is further branched into three from the connector 156d and connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611, the serial-parallel conversion IC 612, and the connector 156e. Further, in the frame side IC substrate 602, the connector 156e is disposed at an end portion on the frame side IC substrate 603 side. The wiring from the connector 156e of the frame side IC substrate 602 is connected to the connector 156f of the frame side IC substrate 603. The wiring pattern of the frame side IC substrate 603 is connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 613.

  Further, the wiring from the connector 156g of the relay substrate 607 is connected to the connector 156h of the frame side IC substrate 605. The wiring pattern of the frame side IC substrate 605 is further branched from the connector 156h, one is connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615, and the other is connected to the input IC 620.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a door opening sensor 155 for detecting the opening of the game frame 11 is attached.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the back surface of the game board 6. As shown in FIG. 5, a base (board-side IC board) 601 for mounting an IC or the like is attached to the back surface of the game board 6. On the board-side IC board 601, four serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 for converting serial data into parallel data are mounted. A control signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 to the motors 151a, 152a, and 153a for driving the movable members 151 to 153. Further, a control signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 617 to each of the LEDs 125a to 125f (hereinafter referred to as center decoration lamps 125a to 125f or lamps 125a to 125f) constituting the center decoration lamp. Further, a control signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 618 to the LEDs 126a to 126f (hereinafter referred to as stage lamps 126a to 126f or lamps 126a to 126f) constituting the stage lamp. Further, a control signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 619 to each of the lamps 127 a to 127 b provided in the skeleton 153 that is a movable member and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, the board side IC substrate 601 is configured as a collective substrate on which four serial-parallel conversion ICs are mounted. With such a configuration, it is possible to consolidate boards on which serial-parallel conversion ICs are mounted, and it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the gaming machine.

  The board side IC substrate 601 is equipped with an input IC 621 for converting parallel data into serial data. Detection signals from the position sensors 151b, 152b, and 153b for detecting the positions of the movable members 151 to 153 are input to the input IC 621 in parallel.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a relay board 606 is attached to the game board 6 side, and a relay board 607 is provided on the game frame 11 side. The wiring from the effect control means is first connected to the relay board 606 and further connected to the relay board 607. The wiring from the relay board 606 is connected to the board side IC board 601. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the wiring between the board side IC substrate 601 and the relay substrate 606, the wiring between the relay substrates 606 and 607, and the wiring between the relay substrate 606 and the effect control means are as shown in FIG. Are connected using connectors 157a to 157e. The connection method of the connectors 157a to 157e is the same as the connection method of the connectors 156a to 156h shown in FIG.

  An opening is formed in the upper plate of the plastic frame above the hole for paying out the game ball, and a relay board 607 is provided in the opening. The relay board 607 is a board that relays through the front and back connectors. The connector 157b is disposed on the front side of the plastic frame, and the connectors 156a and 156g are disposed on the back side. Further, the relay board 607 is disposed at the end of the opening to which the game board 6 is attached. As shown in FIG. 4, the relay board 607 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of the end of the opening to which the game board 6 is attached. The relay board 607 is in a state of being shifted so that the positions of the connector 157b arranged on the front side and the connectors 156a and 156g arranged on the back side do not overlap.

  A relay board 606 is provided on the back side of the game board 6. As shown in FIG. 5, the relay board 606 is provided at the end of the game board 6 so as to be positioned in the vicinity of the relay board 607 of the plastic frame. The relay board 606 is a board that relays via a connector, and connectors 157b to 157d are arranged. The connector 157b is connected to an effect control microcomputer (an example of an electric component control microcomputer that controls electric components that are electrically driven) mounted on the game board 6.

  A prepaid card unit (hereinafter also simply referred to as “card unit”) that enables lending of a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 6 also shows a payout control board 37 and an effect control board 80 on which payout control means for controlling the ball payout device 97 to perform payout of a game ball is mounted. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. And a serial output circuit for converting parallel data into serial data and outputting the serial data. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  A random number circuit 503 for generating hardware random numbers is connected to the game control microcomputer 560. The game control microcomputer 560 reads the random number value from the random number circuit 503 when the condition for extracting the random number value is satisfied. The random number circuit 503 is a counter that counts clock signals having a predetermined frequency, and the count value of the counter becomes a random value. A clock signal having a predetermined frequency supplied to the random number circuit 503 is input to a clear terminal of a monitoring circuit (watchdog timer (WDT)) 504. The monitoring circuit is a counter that counts a clock signal having a frequency higher than the frequency of the clock signal input to the clear terminal, but the count value is reset when the clock signal input to the clear terminal becomes high level, for example. Therefore, when the clock signal input to the clear terminal stops for some reason, the monitoring circuit 504 counts up. The fact that the monitoring circuit 504 has counted up indicates that no clock signal is supplied to the random number circuit 503. When counting up, the monitoring circuit 504 outputs a random number error signal indicating that the random number circuit 503 is not operating normally to the gaming control microcomputer 560.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  Also, an input driver circuit for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a to the game control microcomputer 560. 58 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a special symbol display 8 that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, a special symbol hold memory display 18, and a normal symbol hold memory display 41. Perform display control.

  The serial output circuit 78 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560 is constituted by a shift register or the like. The serial control circuit 78 converts the presentation control command output from the CPU 56 into serial data, and sends it to the presentation control board 80 via the relay board 77. Send. The serial output circuit 78 converts the control signal output from the CPU 56 into serial data, and via the relay board 77, the special symbol display 8, the special symbol hold storage display 18, the normal symbol display 10, and the normal symbol. Output to the on-hold storage display 41. The special symbol display 8, the special symbol hold storage display 18, the normal symbol display 10 and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 are provided with serial-parallel conversion ICs for converting serial data into parallel data, respectively. The control signal from the relay board 77 is converted into parallel data and supplied to the special symbol display 8, the special symbol hold storage display 18, the normal symbol display 10, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41.

  The game control microcomputer 560 may include an output circuit that transmits the effect control command in the parallel signal format, and the effect control command output from the CPU 56 may be transmitted to the effect control board 80 in the parallel signal format.

  An information output circuit 64 that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via an information terminal board (frame board / external terminal board) 34 is also mainly used. It is mounted on the substrate 31. The information terminal board 34 is installed on the back surface of the gaming machine. An information output signal from the payout control board 37 is also input to the information terminal board 34 (see FIG. 10).

  In addition, a storage tank for storing game balls is installed on the back surface of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the storage tank reach the ball payout device. Above the ball payout device, a ball break switch as a game medium break detection means is provided. When the ball break switch detects a ball break, the dispensing operation of the ball dispensing device stops. The ball break switch is a switch for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the game ball passage, but a ball break detection switch for detecting the shortage of supply balls in the storage tank is also provided in a portion close to the storage tank. When the shortage of balls detection switch detects a shortage of game balls, the game balls are replenished from the replenishment mechanism provided on the gaming machine installation island.

  When a large number of game balls as prizes based on winning a prize and game balls based on a ball lending request are paid out and the hitting ball supply tray 3 is full, the game balls are guided to the surplus ball receiving tray 4 through the surplus ball passage. When the game ball is further paid out, a sensing lever (not shown) presses a full tank switch (not shown) as a storage state detection means, and the full tank switch as a storage state detection means is turned on. In this state, the rotation of the payout motor in the ball payout device is stopped, the operation of the ball payout device is stopped, and the driving of the ball hitting device is also stopped.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 is used to provide effect control from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The command is received by a serial signal system (serial communication system: a system in which data is transmitted by one signal line), and display control of the variable display device 9 for variably displaying decorative symbols is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the center decoration lamps 125a to 125f and the stage lamps 126a to 126f provided on the game board 6, and is provided on the frame side. The top frame lamps 281a to 281l, the left frame lamps 282a to 282e and the left award ball lamp 51a, the right frame lamps 283a to 283e and the right award ball lamp 51b are displayed, and the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled. .

  In addition, the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the lamps 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e, 51a, 51b output by the effect control means. A serial output circuit 353 for converting a parallel data control signal to serial data is mounted. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 100 of the effect control board 80 is equipped with a serial input circuit 354 that converts the input serial data into parallel data and outputs the parallel data to the effect control means. Therefore, the effect control means outputs the control signals in the serial signal system via the serial output circuit 353, thereby allowing the lamps 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e, 51a, Display control 51b (specifically, light emission control, that is, lighting control (flashing control)) is performed.

  On the game board side, a board-side IC board 601 on which a serial-parallel conversion IC for converting serial data into parallel data is mounted. The board side IC substrate 601 is connected to the effect control substrate 80 via the relay substrate 606. On the game frame 11 side, frame-side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, and 605 on which serial-parallel conversion ICs for converting serial data into parallel data are provided. Each frame side IC substrate 602, 603, 604, 605 is connected to the effect control substrate 80 via the relay substrate 606, 607.

  The effect control board 80, the relay board 606, and the relay board 607 are connected by one bus type wiring route.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 37 and the ball payout device 97. As shown in FIG. 7, the payout control board 37 has a payout control microcomputer (an example of an electric component control microcomputer that controls electrically driven electric components) 370 including a payout control CPU 371. It is installed. The payout control microcomputer 370 pays out a game ball based on the fact that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. Note that “the payout condition is satisfied” means that a game ball has won in any one of the winning areas (for example, each winning opening 29, 30, 33, 39, a big winning opening).

  In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 is a one-chip microcomputer and incorporates at least a RAM. The payout control CPU 371, the RAM (not shown), the ROM (not shown) storing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control means. That is, the payout control means is realized by a payout control CPU 371, a payout control microcomputer 370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I / O port. The I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 370.

  Detection signals from the ball break switch 187 and the full tank switch 48 are input to the I / O port 372 f of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. The detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is input to the I / O port 372e of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. A detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 295 is input to the I / O port 372e of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. The payout motor 289 is provided in the ball payout device 97 and rotates to pay out payout game balls stored on the back surface of the game machine. The payout motor position sensor 295 is a sensor composed of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 289, and is used for detecting that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. It is done. In the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37, the detection signal from the ball break switch 187 indicates that the ball is out of ball, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates that the ball is full. Then, the ball payout process is stopped. Furthermore, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates a full tank state, the ball launching from the ball striking device is stopped. Note that even when the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates a full state, the ball firing from the ball striking device may not be stopped. When the signal line from the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to the ball hitting device, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the ball shot from the ball hitting device. Also good.

  When there is a winning game ball at the winning opening, a prize ball number signal (payout number data) indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a prize ball number signal are fetched from the output circuit 67 of the main board 31 as a payout command signal. A prize ball REQ signal (capture request signal) requesting (reception) is output (transmitted). Specifically, it is turned on. The award ball number signal is composed of 4-bit data (binary 4-digit data) and is output through four signal lines. Note that the on state of the signal, that is, the output state is a state where the signal is significant, and turning on means that the signal receiving side is instructed to start some processing based on the signal. To do. For example, when the prize ball number signal indicating the number of prize balls and the prize ball REQ signal are turned on, the microcomputer 370 is commanded to recognize the number of prizes indicated by the prize ball number signal. Means that. Alternatively, the signal may be turned on by outputting a signal, and the signal may be turned off by stopping the signal output. However, a signal corresponding to the on state is output when the signal is turned on, and the signal is output according to the off condition when the signal is turned off. Alternatively, the on state and the off state may be switched by outputting a signal.

  The prize ball REQ signal and the prize ball number signal are input to the I / O port 372e via the input circuit 373A. When the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the prize ball number signal via the I / O port 372e, the payout control microcomputer 370 controls to drive the ball payout device 97 to pay out the number of game balls indicated by the prize ball number signal. The prize ball REQ signal and the prize ball number signal correspond to a payout command signal for designating the number of payouts.

  The payout control microcomputer 370 outputs a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of balls lent to the information terminal board (frame board / external terminal board) 34 via the output port 372g. To do. Although a driver circuit is installed outside the output port 372g, the description is omitted in FIG.

  In this embodiment, an information output signal such as jackpot information is output from the game control microcomputer 560 to the information terminal board 34, and a prize ball information signal and a ball rental number signal are output from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the information terminal. Although a case of outputting to the board 34 is shown, all information output signals may be output from the game control microcomputer 560. In this case, for example, the award ball information signal and the ball lending number signal are temporarily input from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560, and the game control microcomputer 560 collectively collects the information output signals to the information terminal board 34. May be output. Alternatively, the main board 31 may be directly passed through and output from the external terminal of the main board 31 to the information terminal board 34. Also, in this case, the information terminal board may be output to separate connectors on the game frame 11 side and the game board 6 side, and one is used without distinction between the game frame 11 side and the game board 6 side. May be output together.

  Also, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 372c. A detection signal from an error release switch 375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 372f of the payout control board 37. The error cancel switch 375 is used to cancel the error state by software reset.

  Further, a drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the payout motor 289 is transmitted to the payout motor 289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 97 via the output port 372a and the relay board 72. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 372a, but is not shown in FIG.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 50 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 50 is provided with a usable display lamp, a connecting table direction indicator, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 66 is connected to a power display LED 60, a ball lending LED 61, a ball lending switch 62, and a return switch 63 (not shown in FIG. 1) provided in the vicinity of the hitting ball supply tray 3. .

  A card lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 62 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 63 has been operated are provided to the card unit 50 from the interface board 66 in accordance with the player's operation. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating a prepaid card balance and a ball lending display signal are given from the card unit 50 to the interface board 66. Between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 372f and the output port 372d. An interface board 66 is interposed between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37 via the interface board 66 as shown in FIG.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 50. The card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 50 according to the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received in the card unit 50, the ball lending switch is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 37. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 37.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 50 and, when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 50, drives the payout motor 289 to give a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 370 causes the EXS signal to the card unit 50 to fall. Thereafter, when a BRDY signal from the card unit 50 is not in an ON state, a prize ball payout control is executed when a payout command signal is received from the game control means.

  In this embodiment, the case where the card unit 50 is installed adjacent to the gaming machine as a separate body from the gaming machine is taken as an example, but the card unit 50 may be integrated with the gaming machine. . Further, the present invention can be applied even in the case where game balls corresponding to the amount of money are lent out in accordance with coin insertion.

  Further, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 155 is input to the payout control board 37. In the payout control board 37, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 155 is not input to the payout control microcomputer 370 but is output to the main board 31 via the output circuit 373B. The output may be output to the main board 31 without going through the output circuit 373B. Alternatively, the detection signal of the door opening ship 155 may be temporarily input to the payout control microcomputer 370 and output from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the main board 31 via the output circuit 373B. The payout control microcomputer 370 outputs signals corresponding to detection signals of the full switch 48, the ball break switch 187, and the payout number count switch 301 to the main board 31 via the output port 372b and the output circuit 373B. However, the detection signals of the full tank switch 48, the ball break switch 187 and the payout count switch 301 that are input to the payout control microcomputer 370 are branched at the payout control board 37, and the branched detection signal is output to the output circuit 373B. Via the main board 31. In such a configuration, the payout control microcomputer 370 need not output from the output port 372b signals corresponding to the detection signals of the full tank switch 48, the ball break switch 187, and the payout number count switch 301.

  The detection signal of the door opening sensor 155 input to the payout control board 37 may be further output from the information output circuit 64 to the information terminal board 34 via the main board 31. In this case, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 155 is directly output to the information terminal board 34 via the main control board 31 and the payout control board 37 without being input to both the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370. You may make it do.

  FIG. 8 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77 and the effect control board 80. In addition, although the example shown in FIG. 8 shows the case where only the effect control board 80 is provided regarding effect control, you may provide a lamp driver board and an audio | voice output board | substrate. In this case, the lamp driver board and the sound output board are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101, a RAM (not shown), a serial output circuit 353, a serial input circuit 354, a clock signal output unit 356 and an input capture signal output unit 357. It is installed. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives an effect control command via the serial input circuit 102 and the input port 103. In this case, the serial input circuit 102 converts the effect control command received by the serial signal method into parallel data and outputs the parallel data. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the variable display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the variable display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. The VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the variable display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the variable display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative designs), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 8 illustrates a diode.

  Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving a lamp (in some cases, it may be an LED) via the serial output circuit 353. The serial output circuit converts the input signal for driving the lamp (parallel data) into serial data and outputs the serial data to the relay board 606. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs the sound number data to the speech synthesis IC 173.

  Further, the clock signal output unit 356 outputs a clock signal to the relay board 606. The clock signal from the clock signal output unit 356 is supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 and the input IC 620 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 via the relay substrates 606 and 607. The clock signal from the clock signal output unit 356 is supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 and the input IC 621 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 via the relay substrate 606. Therefore, in this embodiment, a common clock signal is supplied to each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 and the input ICs 620 and 621.

  Further, the input capture signal output unit 357 inputs the input capture signal (latch signal) to the board side IC board 601 or the frame side IC boards 602 to 605 via the relay boards 606 and 607 in accordance with the instruction of the effect control CPU 101. Is output. The input IC 620 mounted on the frame side IC board 605 latches the detection signals of the operation buttons 81a to 81e when the input capture signal from the production control microcomputer 100 is input, and relays boards 606 and 607 as a serial signal system. To the production control microcomputer 100. The input IC 621 mounted on the board-side IC board 601 latches the detection signals of the position sensors 151b, 152b, and 153b when the input capture signal from the production control microcomputer 100 is input, and uses a serial signal method. This is output to the production control microcomputer 100 via the relay board 606.

  When the sound number IC 173 receives the sound number data, the sound synthesizing IC 173 generates a sound or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 175. The amplifier circuit 175 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 173 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 176 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 174 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  In this embodiment, the production control board 80 is mounted with a real time clock (RTC) 381 for outputting the current time. The production control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the production control CPU 101) receives a date signal indicating the current date (year, month, day, day of the week) from the real-time clock 381 and the current time (hour, minute, second). Is input, and various processes are executed based on the current date and time. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 and the real time clock 381 are bus-connected on the effect control board 80. For example, the real-time clock 381 always outputs a date signal or a time signal every predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and the production control CPU 101 inputs the date signal or the time signal that the real-time clock 381 always outputs. Various processes are executed. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs a request command for requesting the output of a date signal and a time signal to the real time clock 381, and the real time clock 381 outputs a date signal and a time signal based on the input of the request command. It may be.

  The real time clock 381 does not output a date signal or time signal, but the presentation control CPU 101 counts each register (year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, second) of the real time clock 381 via the bus. May be read. Then, the effect control CPU 101 may execute various processes based on the read register values.

  The real-time clock 381 is normally operated by power from the gaming machine when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and when the gaming machine is powered off, the real-time clock 381 is a backup power supply circuit 383 ( For example, it operates with power supplied from a battery. Therefore, the real time clock 381 can measure the current date and time even when the gaming machine is turned off. Note that the real-time clock 381 may be operated by power supplied from the backup power supply circuit 383 even when power is supplied to the gaming machine.

  The power of the backup power supply circuit 383 is also supplied to the backup RAM 382 mounted on the effect control board 80. That is, the backup RAM 382 is normally supplied with power from the gaming machine when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and when the gaming machine is turned off, the backup power supply circuit 383 mounted on the effect control board 80. Is supplied with power. The backup RAM 382 may be supplied with power from the backup power supply circuit 383 even when power is supplied to the gaming machine.

  When the production control board is composed of a plurality of boards, the real time clock 381 may be mounted on, for example, a lamp driver board or an audio output board. A real time clock 381 may be mounted on the main board 31. Alternatively, the real time clock 381 may not be provided, and the time may be measured by counting up a counter provided in the backup RAM 382 (for example, counting up the number of winning winnings after the game machine is turned on). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 may execute various processes based on the count value of the counter provided in the backup RAM 382.

  Next, the configuration of the real time clock 381 will be described. FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the real-time clock 381. The real time clock 381 is realized, for example, as a serial interface type real time clock module incorporating a crystal oscillator. As shown in FIG. 9, the real-time clock 381 includes a crystal oscillator 360, an output control unit 361, an interrupt control unit 362, a bus / interface circuit 363, a clock output / calendar function unit 364, a timer register 365, an alarm register 366, A control register 367 and a shift register 368 are included.

  The crystal oscillator 360 outputs an oscillation signal having a predetermined oscillation frequency (for example, 32.768 kHz). The clock output / calendar function unit 364 has a function of outputting a clock signal based on the oscillation signal from the crystal oscillator 360. The clock output / calendar function unit 364 has a function of measuring the date and time based on the oscillation signal from the crystal oscillator 360. For example, the clock output / calendar function unit 364 includes a clock counter and counts time (hour, minute, second) by counting up the clock counter based on the oscillation signal from the crystal oscillator 360. Further, for example, the clock output / calendar function unit 364 includes a calendar counter (hour counter, minute counter, second counter), and a calendar counter (year counter, month counter, day counter based on an oscillation signal from the crystal oscillator 360. ) To manage the date (year, month, day) by counting up. Further, for example, the clock output / calendar function unit 364 includes a day of the week counter, and manages the day of the week by counting up the day of the week counter based on the oscillation signal from the crystal oscillator 360.

  The shift register 368 has a function of converting the date and time counted by the clock output / calendar function unit 364 into serial data and outputting the serial data to the bus / interface circuit 363. The bus / interface circuit 363 has a function of outputting the current date signal and time signal (DATA) as serial data based on the input from the shift register 368. The bus / interface circuit 363 has a function of outputting a clock signal (CLK) based on the output of the clock output / calendar function unit 364.

  The output control unit 361 has a function of outputting a clock signal (FOUT) having a preset frequency based on the oscillation signal from the crystal oscillator 360. For example, the output control unit 361 includes a frequency setting register, and presets the frequency in the frequency setting register based on an external input (FCON). Then, a clock signal (FOUT) is output based on the set frequency set in the frequency setting register.

  The interrupt control unit 362 has a function of outputting an interrupt signal (TIRQ) at predetermined intervals based on a set value (fixed period interrupt time) set in the timer register 365. The interrupt control unit 362 has a function of outputting an interrupt signal (AIRQ) as an alarm at a predetermined time based on a set value (alarm time) set in the alarm register 366.

  In this embodiment, the real-time clock 381 can be accessed from the outside when the inputs of the two enable signals (CE0, CE1) both become high level. For example, when the set value of each register of the real-time clock 381 is set or when the time measured by the real-time clock 381 is adjusted from the outside, the inputs of the two enable signals (CE0, CE1) are both at the high level. Then, the access is permitted and a command is input from the outside. For example, the production control CPU 101 sets the inputs of the two enable signals (CE0, CE1) of the real-time clock 381 to high level, and then performs various commands (date signal and time signal request commands, date setting and time setting commands). Command) is output to the real-time clock 381.

  FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the information terminal board 34. In the example shown in FIG. 10, a signal is input to the information terminal board 34 from the main board 31 via the cable 343 and the connector 341, and a signal is input from the payout control board 37 via the cable 344 and the connector 342. A signal input via the cable 343 is output to, for example, a hall computer via the driver circuit 345, the connector 347, and the cable 349. A signal input via the cable 344 is output to, for example, a hall computer via the driver circuit 346, the connector 348, and the cable 349.

  In the information terminal board (frame board / external terminal board) 34 shown in FIG. 10, the upper part (area where the connector 341, driver circuit 345 and connector 347 are provided) in FIG. The lower portion (the region where the connector 342, the driver circuit 346, and the connector 348 are provided) corresponds to the frame external terminal board. That is, a part related to a signal from the main board 31 or a signal from the payout control board 37 (for example, an information output signal from the payout control board 37 (specifically, a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out or a lending) It is possible to easily determine whether the portion is related to a ball lending number signal indicating the number of balls)). In this case, for example, the award ball information signal and the ball lending number signal are once input from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560, and the game control microcomputer 560 collectively collects the information output signals as information terminals. You may make it output to the board 34. FIG. Alternatively, the main board 31 may be directly passed through and output from the external terminal of the main board 31 to the information terminal board 34. Also, in this case, the information terminal board may be output to separate connectors on the game frame 11 side and the game board 6 side, and one is used without distinction between the game frame 11 side and the game board 6 side. May be output together.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of output port assignment in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 11, the output port 0 is an output port for a payout command signal transmitted to the payout control board 37. Note that the logic (eg, 0 is on) opposite to the “logic” (eg, 1 is on) shown in FIG. 11 may be used.

  From the output port 1, a solenoid (large winning opening door solenoid) 21 for opening and closing a variable winning ball apparatus 20 for opening and closing a large winning opening and a solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid) 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are opened. The drive signal for is output. Output ports 0 and 1 are part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, the time when the signal is in the ON state corresponds to the state where the “signal is being output”.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 12, the bits 0 to 7 of the input port 0 include the count switch 23, the gate switch 32a, the winning port switches 33a, 39a, 29a, and 30a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the first starting port, respectively. A detection signal of the switch 13a is input.

  In addition, the winning ball count signal, the full tank signal, the ball runout signal, the payout error signal, and the door opening / closing signal from the payout control board 37 are input to bits 0 to 4 of the input port 1, respectively. The high level “1” of the prize ball count signal corresponds to the ON state (the state where the payout number count switch 301 is ON). The high level “1” of the full signal corresponds to the on state (the full switch 48 is on). The high level “1” of the ball break signal corresponds to the on state (the state in which the ball break switch 187 is turned on). A high level “1” of the door opening / closing signal corresponds to a state where the door opening sensor 155 does not detect the opening of the game frame 11 (a state where the door is closed).

  A random number error signal from the monitoring circuit 504 is input to bit 5 of the input port 1. The low level (“0”) of the random number error signal corresponds to the ON state (the state where the random number error has occurred). That is, the monitoring circuit 504 maintains the random number error signal at a high level when normal, but changes the random number error signal to a low level when abnormal. Note that a logic opposite to the “logic” shown in FIG. 12 may be used. For example, an input signal in which 1 is on may be an input signal in which 0 is on.

  Bits 0 and 1 of the input port 2 are supplied with a power-off signal from the power supply board and a clear switch detection signal (clear signal), respectively. The power-off signal is a signal that is output when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in a predetermined voltage. The clear switch is a switch that can be operated by a game clerk or the like, and is a switch that is operated when the RAM 55 is to be initialized. The input ports 0 to 2 are a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, the time when the signal is in the ON state corresponds to the state where the “signal is input”.

  FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the effect control board 80, the relay boards 606 and 607, the board side IC board 601, and the frame side IC boards 602, 603, 604, and 605. The effect control microcomputer 100 of the effect control board 80 outputs a clock signal to the relay board 607 together with serial data as a control signal. In addition, an input capture signal for causing the input ICs 620 and 621 to latch the input signal is output to the relay board 606.

  The relay board 606 supplies the serial data and the clock signal input from the effect control microcomputer 100 to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC board 601. And each serial-parallel conversion IC616-619 converts the input serial data into parallel data, and each lamp 125a-125f, 126a-126f, 127a-127c provided in the game board 6, and each movable member The motors 151a to 151c are supplied.

  The relay board 607 is connected to the relay board 606 through a single bus-type wiring route. The serial data line 300 and the clock signal line 301 connected to each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 are connected on the board side IC substrate 601 in a bus form.

  Each serial-parallel conversion IC 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 has a unique ID. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the ID of the IC 616 is 06, the ID of the IC 617 is 07, the ID of the IC 618 is 08, and the ID of the IC 619 is 09.

  In addition, an input IC 621 for inputting a detection signal of a position sensor of each movable member provided on the game board 6 is mounted on the board side IC board 601. In this embodiment, the input IC 621 and the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the board-side IC board 601 include an input signal line 302, a clock signal line 301, and an input capture signal line 303 via a relay board 606. It is connected. The effect control microcomputer 100 outputs an input capture signal to the input IC 621 via the relay board 606 at a predetermined timing. Then, the input IC 621 latches the detection signal of each position sensor based on the input fetch signal (latch signal) and outputs it to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the relay board 606. In this case, the input IC 621 converts the detection signal input in parallel from each position sensor into serial data and outputs it. In this embodiment, the unique ID of the input IC 621 is 11, as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the serial data and clock signal input to the relay board 607 are supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC boards 602 to 605, respectively. And each serial-parallel conversion IC611-615 converts the input serial data into parallel data, and each lamp 281a-281l, 282a-282e, 283a-283e, 51a, 51b, 82a provided in the game frame 11 is provided. To 82d and 83.

  The serial data lines and clock signal lines connected to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 are connected in a bus form on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, first, the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 of the frame-side IC board 604 is input, and the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 and the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 and the serial-parallel of the frame-side IC board 602 are input. The signals are input in the order of the parallel conversion IC 612, and further input from the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 to the serial-parallel conversion IC 613 of the frame side IC substrate 603. The serial data line and the clock signal line connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 are directly connected from the relay board 607.

  Each serial-parallel conversion IC 611 to 615 mounted on each frame side IC substrate 602 to 605 has a unique ID. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the ID of IC 611 is 01, the ID of IC 612 is 02, the ID of IC 613 is 03, the ID of IC 614 is 04, and the ID of IC 615 is 05 It is.

  In addition, an input IC 620 for inputting detection signals of the operation buttons 81 a to 81 e provided on the game frame 11 is mounted on the frame side IC board 605. In this embodiment, an input signal line, a clock signal line, and an input capture signal line are connected to the input IC 620 mounted on the frame side IC board 605 and the production control microcomputer 100 via the relay boards 606 and 607. Has been. The production control microcomputer 100 outputs an input capture signal to the input IC 620 via the relay boards 606 and 607 at a predetermined timing. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs the input capture signal to the input IC 620 at a timing different from the timing of outputting the input capture signal to the input IC 621. Then, the input IC 620 latches the detection signals from the operation buttons 81a to 81e based on the input capture signal (latch signal), and outputs it to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the relay boards 606 and 607. In this case, the input IC 620 converts detection signals input in parallel from the operation buttons 81a to 81e into serial data and outputs the serial data. In this embodiment, the unique ID of the input IC 620 is 10 as shown in FIG.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the panel-side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame-side IC substrates 602 to 605 are connected via one line of wiring. . Specifically, the connection through one system wiring means that the relay boards 606 and 607 are connected in a bus type, and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 are connected in a bus type or a daisy chain type. It is that. That is, being connected through one system of wiring means that the signal output from the signal output side (in this example, the production control board 80) is transmitted from each board (for example, the relay boards 606 and 607) or each IC ( For example, it is connected to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619) so as to be transmitted from the upstream side to the downstream side of the signal flow. Further, it means that the signal is not transmitted by any one of a plurality of independent systems to each board (for example, relay boards 606 and 607) and each IC (for example, serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619). To do. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 are connected in a bus type. As described above, in this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 are provided. The connectors 156a to 156h and 157a to 157e are connected via the relay boards 606 and 607 via one line of wiring. Therefore, the wiring work between the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be performed simply by attaching and detaching the connector, and the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be attached and detached more easily.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605, and the input ICs 620 and 621. The common clock signal is input from the production control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the wiring of the clock signal to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 and the wiring of the clock signal to the input ICs 620 and 621 can be shared, and communication between the effect control means and the board-side IC 601 board, Communication between the effect control means and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 can be realized using one channel, respectively, and the number of wirings can be reduced. Also, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605, and the input ICs 620 and 621 can be easily synchronized. The number of clock signal wirings can also be reduced.

  In this embodiment, addresses are assigned in advance to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619. When the production control microcomputer 100 outputs the control signal converted into serial data, it adds an address to the serial data and outputs it. When each serial-parallel conversion IC 611-619 inputs serial data, it checks whether the address added to the input serial data matches its own address, and if it matches, converts it to parallel data. Supply (ie, output) each lamp. If the addresses do not match, supply to each lamp is not performed.

  14 and 15 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of addresses given to the respective serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619. FIG. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the addresses of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 in a predetermined address storage area previously provided in the RAM or ROM. Yes.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, in the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605, an address 01 is assigned to the IC 611 and an address is assigned to the IC 612. 02 is given, address 03 is given to IC613, address 04 is given to IC614, and address 05 is given to IC615. Further, in the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601, the address 006 is assigned to the IC 616, the address 07 is given to the IC 617, the address 08 is given to the IC 618, and the IC 619 is given to the IC 619. Address 09 is given.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 may be given the same ID as the unique ID of the IC as an address, and an address (specifically, an address including numbers, characters, and symbols different from the unique ID of the IC). , Code data such as JIS codes representing characters and symbols may be used as addresses).

  14 and 15, the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 whose address is 01 converts serial data into parallel data, and converts the top frame lamp of the game frame 11 (in this example, the top frame lamps 281a to 281l). 6 LEDs (281a to 281f). The serial-parallel conversion IC 612 whose address is 02 converts serial data into parallel data, and the top frame lamp of the game frame 11 (in this example, the other six LEDs (281 g to 281 l) of the top frame lamps 281a to 281l). ). Further, the serial-parallel conversion IC 613 whose address is 03 converts the serial data into parallel data, and converts it into a right frame lamp and a right award ball lamp of the game frame 11 (in this example, six LEDs (283a to 283e, 51b)). Supply. Further, the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 whose address is 04 converts the serial data into parallel data, and turns it into a left frame lamp and a left award ball lamp (in this example, six LEDs (282a to 282e, 51a)) of the game frame 11. Supply.

  Further, the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 whose address is 05 converts the serial data into parallel data, and turns it into a plate lamp (in this example, four LEDs (82a to 82d)) provided on the hitting ball supply tray 3 of the game frame 11. At the same time, it is supplied to an operation button lamp 83 (one lamp in this example) provided on the operation buttons 81a to 81e.

  In addition, the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is 06 converts serial data into parallel data, and each movable member provided in the game board 6 (in this example, a role imitating the shape of a beam, a truck, and a skeleton) ) (In this example, three motors (151a, 152a, 153a) are supplied in the reverse direction). The serial-parallel conversion IC 617 whose address is 07 converts the serial data into parallel data, and each lamp of the decorative structure (center decoration) provided in the center of the game board 6 (in this example, six LEDs (125a To 125 f)). The serial-parallel conversion IC 618 whose address is 08 converts the serial data into parallel data, and supplies it to each stage lamp (in this example, 6 LEDs (126a to 126f)) provided around the variable display device 9. To do. The serial-parallel conversion IC 619 whose address is 09 converts serial data into parallel data, and a lamp (three LEDs (127a to 127c in this example)) provided around the movable member (the skeleton 153 in this example). To supply.

  FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing the configuration of each serial-parallel conversion IC 611-619. As illustrated in FIG. 16, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 include a data latch unit 651, a shift register 652, a header / address detection unit 653, a data buffer 655, and a sync driver 656.

  The data latch unit 651 includes, for example, a latch circuit. When serial data is input, the data latch unit 651 latches the input data bit by bit at the rising timing of the clock signal pulse and outputs the latched data to the shift register 652. The shift register 652 sequentially stores data input bit by bit from the data latch unit 651. The shift register 652 shifts stored data bit by bit at the rising timing of the pulse of the clock signal. By repeatedly shifting the stored data bit by bit in this way, the data finally input as serial data (that is, in the serial signal system) is stored in the shift register 652.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the format of serial data output from the production control microcomputer 100. FIG. 17A shows a data format of serial data output as lamp lighting data for individually lighting or extinguishing the LEDs constituting each lamp provided in the game board 6 or the game frame 11. FIG. 17B shows a format of serial data output as a reset command for resetting all the LEDs constituting each lamp provided in the game board 6 and the game frame 11 to turn them off.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the lamp lighting data is composed of 28 bits, and includes 9-bit header data, mark bits (M), 8-bit addresses, 8-bit data, and end bits (E). .

  The header data represents the beginning of the data, and is 1FF (H) in this example. (H) indicates a hexadecimal number. The mark bit (M) is a bit (logical value 0 in this example) representing a data delimiter, and is inserted between the header data and the address and between the address and the data. The address is the address of the data-output destination serial-parallel conversion IC. An ID that is a unique serial number of each serial-parallel conversion IC 611 to 619 may be used as the address.

  The data (8 bits) is for controlling the lighting state of the LEDs constituting each lamp. For example, the data (8 bits) includes a logical value 1 as a bit corresponding to the LED constituting the lamp to be lit, A logical value 0 is included as a bit corresponding to the LED constituting the lamp. The end bit (E) indicates the end of data, and is a logical value 0 in this example.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, the reset command is composed of 19 bits, and includes 9-bit header data, mark bits (M), 8-bit reset data, and end bits (E).

  The header data represents the beginning of the data, and is 1FF (H) in this example. The mark bit (M) is a bit (logical value 0 in this example) representing a data delimiter, and is inserted between the header data and the reset data. The reset data is for resetting the lighting states of the LEDs constituting each lamp so that all the LEDs are extinguished. The end bit (E) indicates the end of data, and is a logical value 0 in this example.

  In this embodiment, the lamp lighting data shown in FIG. 17A or the reset command shown in FIG. 17B is input, and the shift register 652 is repeatedly shifted bit by bit at the rising edge of the clock signal pulse. Will be stored.

  The header / address detector 653 detects the header and address from the data stored in the shift register 652. First, the header / address detection unit 653 constantly detects data from the shift register 652, and confirms whether or not the content of the detected data matches 1FF (H) corresponding to the header data. If it matches with the header data (1FF (H)), it is determined that the position matching the header data is the head of the data, and it is determined that one set of lamp lighting data or reset command is stored in the shift register 652. Next, the header / address detection unit 653 detects the 11th to 18th bits of data from the head corresponding to the address from the shift register 652, and whether or not it matches the address previously given to the serial-parallel conversion IC. To check. The board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 are provided with, for example, address storage registers 654 that store addresses of serial-parallel conversion ICs to be mounted. The header / address detector 653 may check whether the address detected from the shift register 652 matches the address stored in the address storage register 654 in advance. If the addresses match, the header / address detection 653 determines that data destined for the serial-parallel conversion IC has been input, and outputs an input capture signal (latch signal) to the data buffer 655. If the addresses do not match, the header / address detection 653 does not output the input capture signal to the data buffer 655. That is, in this case, since the data is not addressed to the serial-parallel conversion IC, the data stored in the shift register 652 is discarded without being output to the data buffer 655.

  FIG. 16 shows a case where an address storage register 654 is provided in advance on the board side IC substrate 601 and each of the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605, but instead of the address storage register 654, a serial- An address is provided from an external hardware circuit (for example, a circuit mounted on the effect control board 80) via an address terminal (8 terminals (corresponding to each bit of an 8-bit address)) provided in the parallel conversion IC. May be input. An address may be input to the serial-parallel conversion IC by controlling the input of each address terminal to “H” (high level) or “L” (low level) from the external hardware circuit side. . In this case, for example, the external hardware circuit sets the input to the terminal to “H” by applying a voltage to the terminal corresponding to any bit of the address, or the input to the terminal by switching to the ground. Control to be “L”.

  The data buffer 655 is constituted by, for example, a latch register. When an input capture signal is input from the header / address detector 653, the data of the 20th to 27th bits from the head corresponding to the data portion is captured from the shift register 652. Latch with. The data buffer 655 supplies (that is, outputs) the captured data as parallel data (Q0 to Q7) to the LEDs constituting each lamp.

  If the data stored in the shift register 652 is a reset command, the 11th to 18th bits from the beginning all store data having a logical value of 1. In this case, the data buffer 655 determines that a reset command has been input when all data having a logical value of 1 is fetched, and the LEDs constituting all the lamps are reset and turned off.

  The sync driver 656 inverts and outputs the logical value of the parallel data output from the data buffer 655 based on a predetermined logic inversion setting signal, or outputs it as it is. For example, when the predetermined logic inversion setting signal is “H”, it turns on when the bit value of the parallel data output from the data buffer 655 is 1 (that is, the corresponding bit value of the lamp lighting data is 1). And an ON signal is output to the LEDs constituting each lamp. In this embodiment, the set value of the logic inversion setting signal is set in advance in the registers provided on the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602-605. It is assumed that an ON signal is output to the LEDs constituting each lamp in accordance with a preset setting value, and the LEDs constituting each lamp are turned on.

  FIG. 18 is a timing chart showing an example of input timing of serial data and clock signals to the serial-parallel conversion IC and output timing of parallel data. In FIG. 18, a case where lamp lighting data is input by a serial signal method will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, serial data is input to the shift register 652 of the serial-parallel conversion IC in units of 1 bit in the order of header data, mark bits, addresses, mark bits, data, and end bits. The series of data is set as one set. The header / address detection unit 653 does not detect header data until one set of serial data (in this example, lamp lighting data) has been input, so the output of the data buffer 655 does not change. Therefore, the lighting pattern based on the serial data received last time is output from the serial-parallel conversion IC as it is by the parallel signal method (method for sending data at a time through a plurality of signal lines).

  When all sets of serial data have been input, the data portion from the data stored in the shift register 652 is latched in the data buffer 655, and a lighting pattern based on the newly received serial data is output in a parallel signal system. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, among the parallel data output by the serial-parallel conversion IC, Q0 and Q4 are the rising timing of the pulse of the next clock signal after completion of the serial data input. Immediately, the data is switched to new lighting pattern data. Q1 and Q5 are switched to new lighting pattern data with a delay of one clock from Q0 and Q4. Q2 and Q6 are switched to new lighting pattern data with a delay of two clocks from Q0 and Q4. Further, Q3 and Q7 are switched to new lighting pattern data with a delay of three clocks from Q0 and Q4.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (in this embodiment, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14A.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, a ball out flag, and a payout stop An initial value is set to a flag such as a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state.

  Further, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command for initializing a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed initialization processing). Is transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the initialization control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the variable display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 inputs data (input data) of the input port 1 (see FIG. 12) (step S14A), and inputs an input port data designation command (see FIG. 22) in which the input data is set to the second byte. (Step S14B). It should be noted that immediately after the power supply to the gaming machine is started, when an abnormality occurs in which the clock signal is not supplied to the random number circuit 503, the data of bit 5 of the input port 1 is “0”. . Further, the CPU 56 stores the input data in the input port 1 buffer that is an area of the RAM 55 (step S14C).

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number for determining the value. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as a variable display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 transmits the input data of the input port 1 as an input port data designation command to the effect control board at the start of power supply to the gaming machine (steps S14A to 14C), but steps S14A to 14C. In the first timer interrupt process, whether or not the bit of the random error signal in the input data of the input port 1 indicates an off state (a state where there is no random error, that is, a normal state) is not executed. If it is in the off state, an input port data designation command may be transmitted. In that case, the rendering control CPU 101 of the rendering control microcomputer 100 generates a random number error when the input port data designation command cannot be received within a predetermined time after the power supply is started and the control can be performed. It is determined that When such control is performed, the control burden is reduced as compared with the case where the CPU 56 checks whether or not a random number error has occurred within a predetermined time.

  The CPU 56 determines whether or not random number update abnormality has occurred when executing the initial setting (for example, one of steps S1 to S5). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the first timer interruption process is performed. The input port data designation command may be transmitted. In this case, the CPU 56 may add the bit of the random error signal and transmit the input port data designation command. In this case, the CPU 56 does not transmit a command related to a random error (for example, an input port data designation command to which a bit of the random error signal is added) when executing the second and subsequent timer interrupt processing. Also good. For example, if the random number update abnormality flag is set in advance when it is determined at the time of initial setting that there is a random number update abnormality, and if the random number update abnormality flag is set when the input port is determined, the A command relating to a random number error may be transmitted as a condition. For example, if there is a random number error flag in the first interrupt process, the CPU 56 sets a random number error bit, transmits a command in addition to the bit of the input port status (for example, full), and the random number error. Reset the flag. Then, based on the fact that the random number error flag is not set in the second and subsequent interrupt processing, the CPU 56 does not transmit a command related to the random number error (does not set a value in the bit corresponding to the random number error). Good.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S35 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, These state determinations are performed (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes display control processing for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage display 18, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 (step S22). For the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S33 and S34.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes an input port data confirmation process for transmitting the input data of the input port 1 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when the input data of the input port 1 (see FIG. 12) changes (step). S22).

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determining jackpot symbols used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S24). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S25 and S26).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S27). In the special symbol process, the corresponding symbol is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S29). Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall computer, for example (step S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Execute (Step S31). Specifically, payout control is performed in response to detection of a winning based on one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control signal (payout command signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the substrate 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 according to the payout command signal.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S32: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, if the change speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 performs variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S34). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S35), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S34 (excluding step S30) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  Next, the special symbol process (step S27) in the main process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process processing program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560). The game control microcomputer 560 is a first start for detecting that a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6 in the special symbol process. If the mouth switch 13a or the second start opening switch 14a is turned on, that is, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 has occurred (step S311), the start opening After performing the switch passage processing (step S312), any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state. If the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of numerical data stored (the number of reserved memories) stored in the reserved memory number buffer. The number of numerical data stored in the reserved memory number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the reserved memory number counter. Also, if the count value of the pending storage number counter is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state, and whether or not the display result of the variable symbol special display is set as the specific display result (whether it is a big hit) Or not). A big hit flag is set for a specific display result. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Variations of variable display of special symbols (corresponding to the variation time here), multiple types of variations determined in advance according to the random number for determining the variation pattern (one of the display symbol random numbers) extracted at the time of starting winning Select from patterns. In addition, the variation pattern command is set in the variation pattern buffer in order to transmit information (variation pattern command, that is, variable display pattern command) for commanding the variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) according to step S302.

  Special symbol variation process (step S302): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the special symbol process timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the special symbol process timer becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) Is controlled to shift to step S303 (3 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (step S303): The special symbol on the special symbol display 8 is stopped. If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S304. If not, the internal state is updated to shift to step S300.

  Preliminary winning opening process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus to open the big prize opening. To do. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the process timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) according to step S305. It should be noted that the pre-winner opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting a round, the pre-opening pre-opening processing is also a process of starting a big hit game. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 realizes a specific game state transition control means by executing the pre-opening process for the big prize opening. Further, the specific game state transition control means may be defined as being realized by the effect control microcomputer 100 executing the jackpot display process. That is, the time point when the specific gaming state is started may be the time point when the effect for notifying the occurrence of the big hit is started. In this case, the specific time from the point in time when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result on the variable display device 9 corresponds to the period during which the jackpot symbol is displayed.

  Large winning opening open process (step S305): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. A control for sending an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. Further, when the closing condition for the special winning opening is established, the control for closing the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special variable winning ball apparatus to close the special winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the post-hit opening process is set by the process timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) according to step S306.

  Post-winner opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. Processing such as checking whether there is a remaining round in the big hit gaming state is performed. If there is still a remaining round, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S304. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) according to step S307.

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) according to step S300.

  FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 100. In the example shown in FIG. 22, commands 8000 (H) to 8006 (H) are effect control commands (variation) for designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols variably displayed on the variable display device 9 in response to variable display of special symbols. Pattern command). The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8006 (H), the variable display device 9 controls the variable display device 9 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

  The command 8C00 (H) is an effect control command (offset specifying command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design specified by the variation pattern command is to be lost. Command 8C01 (H) is an effect control command (normal jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 8C02 (H) is an effect control command (probability variable jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is a probability variation jackpot.

  Hereinafter, the miss designation command, the normal jackpot designation command, and the probability variation jackpot designation command may be referred to as display result commands.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command) for instructing stop of variable display of ornamental symbols.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  The command 9500 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) transmitted when the gaming state is the normal state, and the command 9501 (H) is a state where the gaming state is in a high probability state after a probable big hit. Is an effect control command (high probability state background designation command) transmitted when Hereinafter, the effect control commands 9500 (H) and 9501 (H) are referred to as background designation commands. The effect control microcomputer 100 selects the type of background to be displayed on the variable display device 9 in accordance with the received background designation command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Command AXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Of these, A000 (H) is an effect control command (normal jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) that designates the start of a normal jackpot game. A001 (H) is an effect control command (probability change big hit start designation command: second fanfare designation command) that designates the start of probability variation big hit game.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of a big winning opening) that designates display during a round during a big hit game. Note that the number of rounds displayed in “XX” is set. The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big prize opening) that specifies display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

  A300 (H) is an effect control command (ordinary jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the normal jackpot game. A301 (H) is an effect control command (probability variation jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of probability variation jackpot game.

  Command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (effect storage information specifying command) for specifying the number of reserved memories. Of these, the command C000 (H) is an effect control command (effect storage information 0 specifying command) that specifies that the number of reserved memories is zero. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (effect storage information 1 specifying command) for specifying that the number of reserved memories is 1. Command C002 (H) is an effect control command (effect storage information 2 designation command) for designating that the number of reserved memories is two. Command C003 (H) is an effect control command (effect storage information 3 specifying command) that specifies that the number of reserved memories is three. Command C004 (H) is an effect control command (effect storage information 4 specifying command) that specifies that the number of reserved memories is four.

  Command FFYY (H) is an effect control command (input port data designation command) indicating input data of input port 1. YY indicates input data of the input port 1.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the variable display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 22, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the sound output board 70. Note that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIG. 22 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, a more detailed presentation control command related to the big hit game and a presentation control command indicating a gaming state (for example, a presentation control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the presentation control board 80.

  FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols and decorative symbols used in this embodiment. In FIG. 23, “EXT” indicates EXT data of the second byte in the effect control command for designating a variation pattern of a decorative pattern having a 2-byte configuration. “Time” indicates the variation time (variable display period of identification information) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol.

  In this example, as a variation pattern of special symbols and decorative symbols, the difference in various production modes, such as whether to make a difference, whether to make a big hit, whether to reach, whether to reach, etc. There are multiple types available. In this embodiment, the reach effect is performed using the variable display device 9 that performs variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variation pattern in which the EXT data is “00 (H)” to “03 (H)” is a variation pattern that is used at the time of deviation variation. In addition, the fluctuation pattern in which the EXT data is “04 (H)” to “06 (H)” is a fluctuation pattern that is used at the time of big hit fluctuation (including both probability variation big hit and normal big hit). In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern in which the EXT data is “04 (H)” to “06 (H)” is a case where the big hit fluctuation when the probability variation big hit is determined and the normal big hit are determined in advance. This is a fluctuation pattern that is used for both big hit fluctuations.

  The “normal fluctuation” is a fluctuation pattern that does not involve a reach mode. “Reach A” is a variation pattern having a reach mode different from “Reach B” and “Reach C”. “Reach B” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “reach A” and “reach C”. “Reach C” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “reach A” and “reach B”. Further, the difference in reach mode means that a change mode (speed, rotation direction, etc.), a character, or the like of a different mode appears in the reach change time.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of EXT data (YY portion) of the command FFYY (H) (input port data designation command). The bit assignment of EXT data is the same as the bit assignment of input port 1 shown in FIG. That is, a random number error designation bit corresponding to the random number error signal is assigned to bit 5 (D5). Bit 4 (D4) is assigned a door opening error designation bit corresponding to the door opening / closing signal. A payout error designation bit corresponding to the payout error signal is assigned to bit 3 (D3). Bit 2 (D2) is assigned a ball-out error designation bit corresponding to the ball-out error signal. Bit 1 (D1) is assigned a full tank error designation bit corresponding to the full tank error signal. A prize ball count designation bit corresponding to the prize ball count signal is assigned to bit 0 (D0). In the example shown in FIG. 24, since the bits 6 and 7 of the EXT data of the input port data designation command are unused, information indicating errors determined by the game control microcomputer 560 (for example, In the case where it is configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning at the big winning opening has occurred, the detection of the count switch 23 even though the occurrence of the abnormal winning, that is, the control for opening the big winning opening is not performed. This information can be used when transmitting information indicating that the signal is turned on) to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Note that not all bit states of the input port 1 are transmitted as input port data designation commands as they are, but when any error occurs, the error state is added and the input port data designation command is transmitted. It may be. For example, it is determined whether or not a random circuit error has occurred. If it has occurred, an input port data designation command may be transmitted with a value added to the bit (bit D5) corresponding to the random circuit error.

  The prize ball count signal is input to the information terminal board 34 as it is through the main board 31 (that is, through the main board 31) without being input to the game control microcomputer 560. May be. Further, the award ball count signal is input also to the payout control microcomputer 370, branched on the payout control board 37, and input to the main board 31, via the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 ( That is, it may be configured to input to the information terminal board 34 through both the main board 31 and the payout control board 37. The prize ball count signal is once input to the payout control microcomputer 370 and then input to the game control microcomputer 560 and then input to the information terminal board 34 via the game control microcomputer 560. You may do it. Further, the prize ball count signal may not be input to the effect control board 80.

  The full error signal is inputted to the information terminal board 34 as it is through the main board 31 (that is, through the main board 31) without being inputted to the game control microcomputer 560. Also good. Further, the full tank error signal is not input to the payout control microcomputer 370, but directly through the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 (that is, through both the main board 31 and the payout control board 37). The information terminal board 34 may be configured to input. In addition, the full tank error signal is once input to the payout control microcomputer 370 and then input to the game control microcomputer 560, and is input to the information terminal board 34 via the game control microcomputer 560. It may be. Further, the full error signal may not be input to the effect control board 80.

  The ball break error signal is inputted to the information terminal board 34 as it is through the main board 31 (that is, through the main board 31) without being inputted to the game control microcomputer 560. May be. Further, the ball break error signal is not input to the payout control microcomputer 370 without passing through the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 (that is, through both the main board 31 and the payout control board 37). ), It may be configured to input to the information terminal board 34. In addition, after the ball break error signal is once input to the payout control microcomputer 370, it is further input to the game control microcomputer 560 and is input to the information terminal board 34 via the game control microcomputer 560. You may do it. Further, it may be configured not to input the ball break error signal to the effect control board 80.

  The payout error signal is inputted to the information terminal board 34 as it is through the main board 31 (that is, through the main board 31) without being inputted to the game control microcomputer 560. Also good. Further, the payout error signal may be further input from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560 and input to the information terminal board 34 via the game control microcomputer 560. Further, the payout error signal may not be input to the effect control board 80.

  The door opening / closing signal is input to the information terminal board 34 as it is through the main board 31 (that is, through the main board 31) without being input to the game control microcomputer 560. Also good. Further, the door opening / closing signal is not input to the payout control microcomputer 370, but directly through the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 (that is, through both the main board 31 and the payout control board 37). The information terminal board 34 may be configured to input. In addition, the door opening / closing signal is once input to the payout control microcomputer 370 and then input to the game control microcomputer 560, and is input to the information terminal board 34 via the game control microcomputer 560. It may be. Further, the door opening / closing signal may not be input to the effect control board 80.

  The random number error signal is input to the information terminal board 34 as it is through the main board 31 (that is, through the main board 31) without being input to the game control microcomputer 560. Also good.

  Next, the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process will be described. 25 and 26 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) can start the variation of the special symbol (for example, the value of the special symbol process flag becomes a value indicating step S300). (If it is present) (step S1501), the value of the number of start winning memories (the number of reserved memories) is confirmed (step S1502). Specifically, the count value of the start winning storage counter is confirmed. The case where the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300 is a case where the symbol is not changed in the variable display device 9 and is not in the big hit game.

  If it is not possible to start fluctuation in step S1501, or if the number of reserved memories is 0 in step S1502, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the demonstration display flag is set (step S1503). ). The demonstration display flag is a flag indicating that the presentation of the customer waiting demonstration is being executed. If it is set, the special symbol normal process is terminated as it is. If not set, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a demonstration display flag (step S1504), and transmits a demonstration display command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1505).

  If the number of reserved memory is not 0 in step S1502, each random number value (each determination random number or display design random number) stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. At the same time (step S1506), the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S1507), and the value of the reserved storage number is decreased by 1 (the value of the start winning storage counter is decreased by 1). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n−1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories is extracted always matches the order of the number of reserved memories = 1, 2, 3 and 4. Yes. In other words, in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a process of shifting the contents of each storage area each time a variable display start condition is satisfied.

  Note that the effect control microcomputer 560 performs the effect symbol command control process (step S1507) based on the update of the value of the start winning memory counter (the value of the predetermined work area provided in the RAM is updated). In step S29), an effect storage information designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the effect storage information 0 designation command when the updated number of reserved memories is 0, and when the updated number of reserved memories is 1, the effect storage information. 1 designation command is transmitted. When the number of reserved storage after update is 2, an effect storage information 2 designation command is transmitted. When the number of reserved storage after update is 3, the production storage information 3 designation command is transmitted. Send.

  In this embodiment, first, an effect storage information designation command is transmitted (see step S1507), then a display result command is transmitted (see steps S1517, S1518, and S1519), and then a background designation command is transmitted ( Next, the variation pattern command is transmitted (see steps S205 and S206). Note that the order in which the effect control commands are transmitted is not limited to that shown in the present embodiment. For example, the command transmission may be performed in the order of the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result command, and the effect storage information command. . Note that the effect storage information designation command may be transmitted not in the same timer interrupt process as the variation pattern command, but in an interrupt process subsequent to the interrupt process that transmitted the variation pattern command.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a big hit determination process (steps S1508 to S1511) for determining whether or not to win. The game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S1508), and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1509). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 may use a software random number or a hardware random number output from the random number circuit as the big hit determination random number used for the big hit determination.

  If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in step S1510), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a big hit flag (step S1511). The big hit flag is a flag indicating that it has been decided to make a big hit.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a special symbol information setting process (steps S1512 to S1521) for setting a jackpot symbol and a type of jackpot. The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S1512). If the jackpot flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 determines from the random number storage buffer the special symbol stop symbol and jackpot type (whether it will be a promiscuous jackpot or normal jackpot) when it is determined to be a jackpot. The jackpot symbol random number for determination is read (step S1513). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the stop symbol and jackpot type of the special symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number (step S1514).

  If the determined big hit type is a probable big hit (Y in step S1515), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a probable big hit flag indicating that it has been determined to be a probable big hit (step S1516). Then, the effect designation value indicating the probability variation big hit is set in the effect symbol information buffer (step S1517). Further, if the determined big hit type is not a probable big hit (N in step S1515), the game control microcomputer 560 sets an effect designation value indicating a normal big hit in the effect symbol information buffer (step S1518).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S1512, the game control microcomputer 560 sets an effect designation value indicating a loss in the effect symbol information buffer (step S1519).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1520). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not a high probability flag, which will be described later, is set. If the high probability flag is set, a high probability state background designation command (command 9501 ( H)) is transmitted, and if not set, a normal state background designation command (command 9500 (H) shown in FIG. 22) is transmitted. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value indicating the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S1521).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S201). When the big hit flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 decides to use the big hit variation pattern determination table (step S202). If the big hit flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 determines to use the deviation variation pattern determination table (step S203).

  In the big hit variation pattern determination table, variation patterns (“04 (H)” to “06 (H)”) selected in advance for the big hit shown in FIG. 23 are set, and a plurality of determinations are made for each variation pattern. A value has been assigned. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation, variation patterns (“00 (H)” to “03 (H)”) selected at the time of deviation shown in FIG. 23 are set in advance, and a plurality of variation patterns are set for each variation pattern. The judgment value is assigned.

  Further, in the case of executing the reach effect in the display of the decorative symbols, the game control microcomputer 560 further determines the reach effect based on the reach effect determining random number for determining whether or not to execute the reach effect. It may be determined whether or not to execute the effect. When it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, a variation pattern including the reach effect may be selected.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number storage buffer, and uses the variation pattern determination table for big hits or the variation pattern determination table for loss based on the read value of the variation pattern determination random number. A symbol variation pattern is determined (step S204). Specifically, the variation pattern corresponding to the determination value that matches the variation pattern determination random value is determined as the variation pattern of the decorative design executed by the variable display device 9.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a variation pattern designation value corresponding to the determined variation pattern (variation time) in the effect symbol variation pattern buffer (step S205). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the head address of the command transmission table in the pointer (step S206). Note that the game control microcomputer 560 sets the change pattern designation value in the effect symbol change pattern buffer in step S205, and sets the head address of the command transmission table in the pointer in step S206. In the process, first, a variation pattern command is transmitted based on the variation pattern designation value set in the effect symbol variation pattern buffer corresponding to the head address of the command transmission table. In the effect symbol command control process, by adding one address indicating the command transmission table one by one, command transmission is performed every 2 ms in the order of the variation pattern command, the display result command, and the effect storage information command. In this embodiment, the variation pattern command, the display result command, and the effect storage information command are transmitted every 2 ms, thereby making it difficult for the effect control microcomputer 100 to fail to receive the command. .

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the variation time in the special symbol process timer (step S207). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S302 (step S208).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (step S302) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation process, first, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the special symbol process timer by -1 (step S351). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol process timer has expired (that is, whether or not the value of the special symbol process timer is 0), and if it has not expired (N in step S352), The special symbol variation process is terminated. If the special symbol process timer has expired (Y in step S352), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S303 (step S353).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation stop process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation stop processing, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display 8, and derives and displays the stop symbol determined in the special symbol normal processing (see step S1514) (step S1301). ). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to transmit a decoration symbol stop designation command (8F00 (H)) for designating stoppage of the variation of the decoration symbol in the variable display device 9 to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1). S1302). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S1303).

  If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the game control microcomputer 560 stops the jackpot symbol in the jackpot control timer that measures the time for controlling the opening / closing of the jackpot. An execution time (hit display time (for example, 3 seconds)) for notifying the player that the jackpot game will be started after the display (fanfare display time (for example, 3 seconds)) is set (step S1304).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is set (step S1305). If not set, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a normal jackpot start designation command (first fanfare designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1306). Then, control goes to a step S1308.

  If the probability variation jackpot flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a probability variation jackpot start designation command (second fanfare designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1307). Then, control goes to a step S1308.

  In step S1308, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the high probability flag (step S1308). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S304 (step S1309).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S1303, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the internal state (special symbol process flag) to a value corresponding to step S300 (step S1310).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (step S304). In the big winning opening opening pre-processing, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S402). If the value is not 0 (N in step S402), the process is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S402), the address of the big prize opening opening setting table for setting the opening time (round time) of the big prize opening is set to the pointer. (Step S403).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the maximum time (round time) during which the big winning opening can be opened in each round in the big win in the big winning opening control timer (step S404). The round time is, for example, 29.5 seconds.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sends a display command (A1XX (H)) during the big prize opening to specify the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during the round). Control to transmit to 100 is performed (step S405). The number of rounds is recognized by checking the value of a round number counter that counts the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the solenoid 21 to be driven to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S406), and increments the value of the round number counter (step S407). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, and the game control microcomputer 560 turns on / off the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port in step S406. The content related to off is set according to the open / close state of the solenoid to be driven. Then, the contents set in the RAM area of the output port in the output process of step S32 are output to the output port. As a result, a drive command signal is output from the output port to the solenoid circuit 59. The solenoid circuit 59 outputs a drive signal for driving the solenoid in response to a drive command signal to drive the solenoid. Hereinafter, in the process of opening and closing the solenoid, such an operation is performed.

  Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (step S408).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process (step S305) in the special symbol process. In the process for opening the big prize opening, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not the game ball has won the big prize opening by checking whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on (step). S421). If the count switch 23 is not turned on (N in step S421), the process proceeds to step S424. If the count switch 23 is on (Y in step S421), the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening (step S422). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S423). If the value of the winning number counter is not the predetermined number (N in Step S423), the process proceeds to Step S424.

  In step S424, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the special winning opening control timer. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S425). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S425), the process is ended as it is.

  When the value of the winning prize counter has reached the predetermined number (Y in step S423) or when the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S425), the game control microcomputer 560 is Then, the address of the time table after opening the big prize opening for setting the time (interval time) from the end of the round to the start of the next round is set in the pointer (step S426).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the time (interval time) from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval time) during the big hit (step S427). The interval time is 5 seconds, for example.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 effects the display designation command (A2XX (H)) after the big prize opening that designates the display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the end of the round). Control to transmit to the microcomputer 100 is performed (step S428). In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 and close the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S429). Also, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S430). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (post-winning-game opening post-processing) (step S431).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the post-hit opening post-process (step S306) in the special symbol process. In the process for opening the big prize opening, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by -1 (step S441). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S442). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S442), the process is terminated as it is.

  If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S442), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter has reached 15 (step S443).

  If the value of the round number counter has not reached 15 in step S443 (N in step S443), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to step S304 (pre-opening process for the big prize opening) (step S443). S444), the process ends.

  When the value of the round number counter is 15 in step S443 (Y in step S443), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S445). If not set, a normal jackpot end designation command (first ending designation command) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S446). If it is set, a probability variation big hit end designation command (second ending designation command) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S447).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the execution time (big hit end time) of the effect (ending effect) for notifying the player of the end of the big hit in the big prize opening control timer (step S448), and the special symbol process flag is set. The value is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (big hit end process) (step S449).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the big hit ending process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize winning control timer by -1 (step S461). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer is 0 (step S462). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S462), the process is terminated as it is.

  If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S462), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S463). If the probability variation jackpot flag is set (Y in step S463), a high probability flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state is set (step S464). In other words, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probable state, the transition to the high probability state in which the probability that the special symbol stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol after the jackpot game ends is improved from the normal state. Then, the ease of winning the game ball to the second start winning opening 14 is controlled to be in the low base state which is the same state as the normal state. For example, in this embodiment, the time, number of times, and frequency of opening the second start winning opening 14 are not changed depending on whether the gaming state is the probability variation state or the normal state. This is also said to be controlled to a high probability / low base state in the probability variation state.

  If the probability variation jackpot flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 proceeds to step S465 as it is. That is, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the state is not shifted to the high probability state and is controlled to remain in the low base state. This is also said to be controlled to a low probability / low base state in the normal state.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the big hit flag (step S465). If the probability variation jackpot flag is set, the probability variation jackpot flag is reset (step S466).

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the internal state (value of the special symbol process flag) to a value corresponding to step S300 (special symbol normal process) (step S467).

  Next, payout control commands (payout control signals) transmitted and received between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 will be described. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a payout command signal and the like transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370.

  The prize ball REQ signal is a signal that is in an output state (= ON state) when a prize ball number command is transmitted (that is, a trigger signal for a prize ball payout request). The 4-bit prize ball number signal is a signal (prize ball number command) output for designating the number of game balls (0 to 15) to be paid out. The prize ball count signal is a signal corresponding to the detection signal of the payout number count switch 187.

  FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmission / reception of each control signal shown in FIG. In FIG. 35, a signal indicating an abnormality relating to payout (a payout error signal, a ball running out signal, a full tank signal) and a signal indicating another abnormality (door opening error) (door open / close signal) are also output from the payout control microcomputer 370. It is shown to be transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560. Also, a prize ball count signal indicating a state of a detection signal of the number-of-payout count switch 301 at the time of prize ball payout is transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 35, the prize ball REQ signal and the prize ball number signal are output by the game control microcomputer 560 via the output circuit 67 and input to the payout control microcomputer 370 via the input circuit 373A. . A signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560 is output via the output circuit 373B and input via the input circuit 68.

  It should be noted that when bidirectional communication is performed between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370, it is indicated that the payout control microcomputer 370 is paying out instead of transmitting a prize ball count signal. A BUSY signal may be transmitted. According to this configuration, the game control microcomputer 560 can recognize whether or not a prize ball is being paid out by checking whether or not the BUSY signal is received.

  FIG. 36 is a timing chart showing an example of how to issue the payout command signal. As shown in FIG. 36, the winning detection switch (the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a) has detected the winning of the game ball. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 560 turns on the prize ball REQ signal and turns the output state of the prize ball number signal into a state corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with winning. Specifically, when the gaming control microcomputer 560 detects that a game ball has won a winning area provided in the gaming machine based on a detection signal from the winning detection switch, the gaming control microcomputer 560 calculates a predetermined number of winning balls. It is added to the contents of the total winning ball number storage buffer. When the content of the total winning ball number storage buffer becomes a non-zero value, the winning ball REQ signal is turned on, and the output state of the winning ball number signal is set in accordance with the number of winning balls to be paid out according to winning. Put it in a state.

  In this embodiment, four game balls are paid out when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a, and 15 game balls are detected when the count switch 23 detects a game ball. Perform prize ball payout. It should be noted that the number of award ball payouts may be different depending on whether a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a or a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 14a. For example, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a, three prize balls are paid out. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 14a, four prize balls are paid out. You may make it perform.

  When game balls are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, seven prize balls are paid out. Further, as described above, since the prize ball number signal is composed of 4 bits, among the prize ball number signals of 00 (H) to 0F (H) expressed in 8 bits, the lower 4 bits are The signal is transmitted from the main board 31 to the payout control board 37 by the award ball number signal. Hereinafter, it may be expressed as “00 (H) to 0F (H) prize ball number signal”, but in reality, the prize ball number signal is represented by 8 bits. This corresponds to the lower 4 bits of 0F (H).

  In this embodiment, as for the payout command signal, the prize ball number signal is transmitted by unidirectional communication in which the signal is transmitted only from the main board 31 toward the payout control board 37, but by bidirectional communication, A prize ball number signal may be transmitted from the main board 31 to the payout control board 37. In this case, for example, the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits an ACK signal (response signal) to the game control microcomputer 560 in response to reception of the prize ball REQ signal, or indicates that a prize ball number signal has been received. You may make it transmit an ACK signal to the microcomputer 560 for game control. Further, in this case, when the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs the ACK signal, it may keep the ACK signal on until the payout of the game ball is completed. Then, when the game ball payout is completed, the ACK signal may be turned off. By doing so, it is possible to check whether or not the game ball has been paid out on the game control microcomputer 560 side by checking whether or not the ACK signal has been turned off after being turned on. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit the award ball number signal again if there is a payout winning ball after the payout is completed. Further, the payout control microcomputer 370 may turn on the ACK signal for a moment when receiving the prize ball REQ signal or the prize ball number signal. In that case, if there is a prize ball that has not been paid out based on the fact that the ACK signal is turned on and turned off, the prize ball number signal may be transmitted again.

  When the prize ball number signal is transmitted by unidirectional communication in which a signal is transmitted only from the main board 31 toward the payout control board 37, the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the prize ball number signal. Then, the payout device 97 may be controlled so that the number of game balls designated by the prize ball number signal is paid out by INT interruption. With such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 560 can transmit the award ball number signal regardless of whether or not the game balls have been paid out. For this reason, the game control microcomputer 560 can eliminate the need to store the number of prize balls in the RAM or the like until one payout is completed, thereby preventing an increase in the storage capacity of the RAM or the like.

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the state of the detection signal of the payout number count switch 187 and the output state of the prize ball count signal. As shown in FIG. 37, the state of the detection signal of the payout number count switch 187 and the output state of the prize ball count signal are almost similar. The delay time from the state of the detection signal of the payout count switch 187 in the output state of the prize ball count signal corresponds to the processing time in the payout control microcomputer 370. In this embodiment, even when a game ball is paid out based on a ball lending request from the card unit 50, the detection signal of the payout number count switch 187 is turned on, but the payout control microcomputer 370 is turned on. Transmits a prize ball count signal only when a prize ball is paid out based on winning.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the input port data confirmation processing in step S23 (see FIG. 20). In the input port data confirmation processing, the CPU 56 reads the data (input data) of the input port 1 (see FIG. 12) from the input port 1 (step S581), and the input data of the input port 1 and the input formed in the RAM. An exclusive OR is performed for each bit with the contents of the port 1 buffer (step S582). If there is a bit with different logic (meaning “1” or “0”) between the input data of the input port 1 and the contents of the input port 1 buffer formed in the RAM, an 8-bit exclusive The operation result of the logical sum does not become 00 (H). Note that the calculation in step S582 may be performed by ANDing the input data of the input port 1 with the data input from the input port 1 in the previous process. In other words, any device that can recognize a change in the state of the input port by some kind of calculation is acceptable. In step S582, the CPU 56 may mask the input data of the input port 1 with “00011111” and then perform exclusive OR for each bit with the contents of the input port 1 buffer.

  Then, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the exclusive OR operation result is 00 (H) (step S583). If the calculation result is 00 (H), the process ends. If the calculation result is not 00 (H), the input data of the input port 1 is set to the second byte of the command buffer (step S584). Also, FF (H) is set in the first byte of the command buffer (step S585). Then, an effect control command transmission request flag is set (step S586). When confirming that the effect control command transmission request flag is set in the effect control command control process in step S29, the CPU 56 transmits the contents of the command buffer as an effect control command. Instead of transmitting the effect control command in the effect control command control process, the effect control command may be transmitted immediately instead of setting the effect control command transmission request flag.

  After setting the effect control command transmission request flag, the CPU 56 stores the input data of the input port 1 input in step S581 in the input port 1 buffer (step S587).

  The input data of the input port 1 is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on condition that the input data of the input port 1 has been changed by the control as described above. At that time, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the input data of the input port 1 as it is as an effect control command. Therefore, even if there is a lot of information indicated by the signal input to the input port 1, the control burden on the game control means is light. However, the CPU 56 may once fetch the data of the input port 1 and store the fetched data in the input port 1 buffer every time.

  Further, since the presentation control command related to the input data of the input port 1 is output from the main board 31 on condition that the input data of the input port 1 has changed, for example, it is always 1 in a predetermined control period (period of 2 ms interval). The transmission cycle of the effect control command is difficult to grasp compared to the case where the effect control command is configured to be transmitted. That is, it becomes difficult to grasp the cycle of the predetermined control period. In the predetermined control period, the counter value for generating a random number related to the jackpot is updated one by one. Therefore, when the period of the predetermined control period is easily grasped, the timing at which the counter value becomes the predetermined value is easily grasped. Become. Predetermined timing refers to the big hit determination random number when the big hit determination random number is created by software, or when it is configured to determine whether or not to make a probable big hit based on the big hit symbol determination random number For example, the timing coincides with the determination value, the timing when the value of the jackpot symbol determination random number matches the value corresponding to the probability variation symbol, and the like. The fact that the timing at which the value of the counter reaches the predetermined value is easily grasped means that it is easy to receive fraud. In this embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to receive fraud.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, the random number circuit 503 and the monitoring circuit 504 are provided outside the game control microcomputer 560, and the random number error signal is input to the game control microcomputer 560 from the outside. Although the input port data designation command is transmitted when the signal changes, the game control microcomputer 560 may determine whether or not a random number error has occurred. For example, the clock signal supplied to the random number circuit 503 is used to reset the WDT, and the signal from the WDT is also input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560. The CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 receives the signal from the WDT. The random number error designation bit of the input port data designation command (see FIG. 24) is set to a value corresponding to the error, assuming that a random number error has occurred when it is determined that the clock signal is interrupted by the error signal indicating error status. To do. Also, the signal line level (high level or low level) of the random error signal from the monitoring circuit 504 is checked a plurality of times. For example, the signal line level of the random error signal becomes a level corresponding to the random error even once. Then, it may be determined that a random error has occurred. In those cases, the CPU 56 does not transmit the input data of the input port 1 as it is as an effect control command, but instead of the random number error in the second byte (EXT data) of the effect control command for the input data of the input port 1. After setting the value of the bit corresponding to the designated bit to a value corresponding to the random number error (“0” in this embodiment), it is set as an effect control command. In these cases, the CPU 56 may determine whether or not a random number error has occurred at the start of power supply, but may always determine after the start of power supply.

  Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 transmits the input data of the input port 1 as it is as the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the CPU 56 receives a part of the input data of the input port 1 as it is. You may make it transmit, process a part, and transmit. For example, the processing may be performed after logical inversion. The logic inversion may be realized by a hardware inversion circuit. Further, as processing, for example, the bit position in one byte may be changed. The change (including shift) of the bit position may be realized by hardware wiring.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 executes the input port data confirmation process shown in FIG. 38 as a timer interrupt process, but executes it in the main process (between steps S16 and S19 shown in FIG. 19). It may be.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the transmission process of the effect control command based on the effect control command transmission request flag in the effect control command control process in step S29. In the effect control command control process, if the effect control command transmission request flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the effect control command transmission request flag (steps S591, S592), and transmits the contents of the command buffer as an effect control command. Therefore, after adding header data, mark bits, and end bits, the data is output to the serial output circuit 78 (step S593).

  Next, the operation of the payout control means by the payout control microcomputer 370 will be described. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of output port assignment in the payout control microcomputer 370. As shown in FIG. 40, the output port 0 is an output port for outputting a signal of each phase supplied to the payout motor 289 by the stepping motor. The output port 1 is an output port for outputting a payout error signal, a ball out signal, a full tank signal, and a prize ball count signal to the game control microcomputer 560. The output port 2 is an output port for outputting each segment of the error display LED 374 using a 7-segment LED.

  Although not shown in FIG. 40, the payout control board 37 is also provided with an output port 3 for outputting an EXS signal and a PRDY signal to the card unit 50. The output ports 0, 1, and 2 correspond to the output ports 372a, 372b, and 372c shown in FIG.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of input port bit assignment in the payout control microcomputer 370. As shown in FIG. 41, a 4-bit prize ball number signal is inputted to bits 0 to 3 of the input port 0, and a prize ball REQ signal from the main board 31 is inputted to bits 4, 6, 7 respectively. The detection signal of the ball break switch 187 and the detection signal of the payout motor position sensor 295 are input. In addition, the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301, the operation signal from the error release switch 375, and the detection signal of the full switch 48 are input to bits 1 to 3 of the input port 1, respectively. The VL signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal from the card unit 50 are input to bits 4 to 6 of the input port 1, respectively. The input ports 0 and 1 correspond to the input ports 372e and 372f shown in FIG.

  Next, the operation of the payout control microcomputer 370 (specifically, the payout control CPU 371) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a payout control process executed by the payout control means. The payout control process is executed by a timer interrupt process based on a timer interrupt generated every 2 ms, for example. In the payout control process, the payout control CPU 371 first performs an input determination process (step S752). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of the input port 0 and the input port 1 and reflecting the detection result in predetermined 2 bytes of RAM (referred to as an input state flag). In the payout control process, when control is performed based on the states of the input port 0 and the input port 1, the state of the input state flag is checked instead of directly checking the state of the input port. In the input determination process, the payout control CPU 371 also performs a process of transmitting the input data of the input ports 0 and 1 to the main board 31.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes a payout motor control process (step S753). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the patterns of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  Also, the payout control CPU 371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 50 (step S754). Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes main control communication processing for communicating with the game control means of the main board 31 (step S755). Further, a prize ball lending control process for performing a control to pay out a lending ball in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 50 and a control for paying out the number of award balls indicated by a prize ball number signal from the main board. Is executed (step S756).

  Then, the payout control CPU 371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S757). In addition, an information output process for outputting a prize ball information signal, a ball lending number signal, and the like output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S758). Further, display control processing for performing a predetermined display on the error display LED 374 according to the result of the error processing is executed (step S759).

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. The contents of the port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer include a payout motor control process (step S753), a prepaid card unit control process (step S754), a main control communication process (step S755), and an information output process (step S758). ) And display control processing (step S759).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the winning ball lending control process in step S756. In the winning ball lending control process, the payout control CPU 371 confirms that the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is turned on (step S401). The value is decremented by 1 (steps S402 and S404), and if the ball is not being lent, the value of the unpaid prize ball counter is decremented by 1 (steps S402 and S403). Next, the payout ball detection bit of the payout control state flag formed in the RAM is set (step S405). The payout ball detection bit is a game regardless of whether the payout motor 289 is driven in one payout ball payout process (up to 15 balls) or one ball lending process (25 payouts) in the payout passing waiting process. This is used to detect that no sphere has passed through the payout number counting switch 301. Thereafter, any one of steps S410 to S412 is executed according to the value of the payout control code.

  In the winning ball lending control process, when checking the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 or subtracting the unpaid number counter, the error bit check is not executed. Therefore, even if an error state relating to the payout of game balls is detected, every time a payout of game balls is detected by the payout number count switch 301, if the payout game balls are loaned balls, a ball rental unpaid number counter 1 is subtracted, and if it is a prize ball, a process of subtracting 1 from the prize ball unpaid number counter is executed. Therefore, even if an error related to payout occurs, the number of unpaid game balls can be managed accurately. That is, a game ball paid out from the ball payout device 97 before the payout control CPU 371 detects the occurrence of an error is detected by the payout number count switch 301 with a slight delay from the time of payout. The payout control CPU 371 generates an error when the occurrence of an error is detected after the game ball is paid out from the ball payout device 97 and before the game ball is detected by the payout number count switch 301. The game balls paid out from the ball payout device 97 before detection can be reflected in the award ball unpaid number counter or the ball lending unpaid number counter.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the payout start waiting process (step S410) executed when the payout control code is 0. In the payout start waiting process, the payout control CPU 371 does not execute the subsequent processes if an error bit (one or more of all error bits (see FIG. 49) in the error flag) is set (step S421). . The error flag is formed in the RAM.

  On the other hand, if the BRDY signal is not in the on state, the process for paying out a prize ball after step S431 is executed. If the BRDY signal is on and the BRQ signal, which is a ball lending request signal, is on, a ball lending operation flag is set (steps S423 and S424). Then, “25” is set in the unpaid ball lending number counter (step S425), and “25” is set in the payout motor rotation number buffer (step S426).

  The payout motor rotation frequency buffer is referred to in the payout motor control process (step S753). That is, in the payout motor control process, control is performed to rotate the payout motor 289 by the number of rotations corresponding to the value set in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer.

  Thereafter, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value (specifically “1”) corresponding to the payout motor activation preparation process (step S522) to the payout motor control code for selecting the process executed in the payout motor control process. It is set (step S427), the value of the payout control code is set to 1 (step S428), and the process ends.

  In step S431, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the winning ball unpaid-out counter is 0 (step S431). If 0, the process ends. The award ball unpaid-out counter is a value other than 0 when the communication related to the payout command signal is normally completed with the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 in the main control communication end process. The number indicated by the prize ball number signal) is added. If the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is not 0, it is confirmed whether it is 15 or more (step S432). If it is less than 15, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is set in the payout motor rotation count buffer (step S433), and if it is 15 or more, “15” is set in the payout motor rotation count buffer. Then, a winning ball operating flag is set (step S435), and the process proceeds to step S427.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a payout motor stop waiting process (step S411) executed when the payout control code is 1. In the payout motor stop waiting process, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the payout operation is completed (step S441). For example, the payout control CPU 371 sets the number of rotations of the payout motor 289 when performing the payout operation, and determines whether or not the rotation control of the payout control motor 289 for the set number of rotations is finished. It is determined whether or not the operation is finished.

  When the payout operation is completed, the payout control CPU 371 sets the payout passing monitoring time in the payout control monitoring timer (step S442). The payout passing monitoring time is a time that has a margin in the time from when the last payout ball is paid out by the payout motor 289 until it passes through the payout number count switch 301. Then, the value of the payout control code is set to 2 (step S443), and the process ends.

  46 to 48 are flowcharts showing a payout passing waiting process (step S412) executed when the value of the payout control code is 2. In the payout passing waiting process, when a prize ball is being paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally if the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter is zero. If the value of the award ball unpaid-out counter is not 0, if it is not in an error state, a re-payout operation of one game ball is tried up to 2 times. In the re-payout operation, when it is detected by the payout number count switch 301 that the game ball is actually paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally. In this embodiment, the maximum number of game balls to be paid out in one prize ball payout operation is 15, and if the prize ball number signal is received during the prize ball payout, the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter is received. Therefore, even when the payout is completed normally, the value of the award ball non-payout number counter may not be 0.

  Further, when the ball lending is being paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally if the value of the ball lending unpaid-out counter is 0. If the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter is not 0, and if it is not in an error state, a re-payout operation of one game ball or the remaining number of ball lending (corresponding to the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter) Try. In this embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out in one ball lending and payout operation is 25 (fixed value), and the payout motor 289 is rotated so that 25 game balls are paid out. Therefore, when the value of the unpaid ball lending counter is not 0, the payout has not been completed normally.

  In the payout passing waiting process, the payout control CPU 371 first checks the value of the payout control timer, and if the value is 0, the process proceeds to step S453 (step S450). If the value of the payout control timer is not 0, the value of the payout control timer is decremented by 1 (step S451). If the value of the payout control timer is not 0 (step S452), that is, if the payout control timer has not timed out, the process is terminated. Note that the process in step S450 is a process that takes into account when a game ball payout retry operation to be described later is started. When the process of step S907 described later is executed, a retry operation is started through a route that moves from step S450 to S453.

  If the payout control timer has timed out (step S452), it is confirmed whether or not a ball lending payout process (ball lending operation) has been executed (step S453). Whether or not the ball lending operation has been executed is confirmed by whether or not the ball lending operation in-progress bit formed in the RAM is set (see steps S423 and S424). When the ball lending operation is not executed, that is, when the prize ball payout process (prize ball operation) is executed, the payout control CPU 371 checks the value of the award ball unpaid number counter (step S454). ). When the value of the winning ball unpaid-out counter is 0, it is determined that the winning ball payout process has been completed normally, and the payout ball detection bit in the payout control state flag, 1 bit during re-payout operation, and during re-payout operation 2 bits, the winning ball operating flag and the ball lending operating bit are reset (step S455), the payout control code is set to 0 (step S456), and the processing is terminated. This bit is set when the switch 301 is turned on, and indicates that the payout number counting switch 301 has detected at least one game ball during the payout operation. Further, 1 bit during the re-payout operation and 2 bits during the re-payout operation are control bits used when executing a re-payout process including two re-payout operations.

  The payout control CPU 371 determines that an error flag (specifically, a payout switch error error 1 bit, a payout switch error error 2 bit, and a payout case error bit when the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is not 0. (One or a plurality of bits) is not set (step S459), and if the payout ball detection bit is not set (step S461), the re-payout operation is executed. To do. If the error flag is set, the re-payout operation is not executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when the payout is completed normally, the value of the unpaid prize ball number counter may not be 0. Therefore, if the payout ball detection bit is set, that is, if the payout number count switch 301 detects the payout of at least one game ball during the prize ball payout process, it is assumed that the prize ball payout process is normally completed. The process proceeds to step S455. For example, when 15 game balls should be paid out in one prize ball payout process, when only 14 game balls are actually paid out (the number of payout count switch 301 is 14 game balls). In this case, the payout ball detection bit is set, so it is considered that the award ball payout process has been completed normally. It should not have been done, and the shortage will be paid out in the next prize ball payout process, so there will be no disadvantage to the player.

  In order to execute the re-payout process, the pay-out control CPU 371 first checks whether or not 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S462). If not set, it is confirmed whether or not 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S463). If 1 bit is not set during the re-payout operation, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations to execute the first re-payout operation (step S464), and 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S465). ) The value of the re-payout operation number or the ball lending unpaid-out number counter is set in the payout motor rotation number buffer (step S466). The payout motor rotation frequency buffer is referred to in the payout motor control process (step S753). That is, in the payout motor control process, control is performed to rotate the payout motor 289 by the number of rotations corresponding to the value set in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer. In step S466, the value of the unpaid ball lending number counter is also handled because step S466 is used in the re-payout process in the lend-out process. That is, in step S466, the payout control CPU 371 sets the re-payout operation number in the re-payout process in the prize ball payout process, and sets the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter in the re-payout process in the ball lending payout process. . Thereafter, the payout control code is set to 1 (step S467), and the process is terminated.

  In step S463, when it is confirmed that 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation, the payout control CPU 371 sets 1 as the re-payout operation number in order to execute the second re-payout (step S468). Then, 1 bit is reset during the re-payout operation (step S469), and 2 bits are set during the re-payout operation (step S470). Then, control goes to a step S466.

  In step S462, when it is confirmed that 2 bits are set during the re-payout operation, the payout control CPU 371 did not pay out the game ball even after executing the re-payout process twice (payout number count switch). 301 has detected no game ball), the payout case error bit in the error flag is set (step S472). At that time, 2 bits during the re-payout operation are reset (step S471). Then, the process ends.

  As described above, if no game balls are paid out even if two re-payout operations are performed in the re-payout process (corrected payout process), it is determined that the game ball payout operation is defective and the payout number count switch is not A passing error bit (payout case error bit) is set.

  Accordingly, in this embodiment, the payout control CPU 371 determines in advance when it detects that the game ball has not been paid out based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 as the payout detection means. Control is performed so that the payout means pays out one game ball up to a predetermined number of times (in this example, twice). In this embodiment, if the game ball is not paid out even if the retry operation for paying out the game ball is performed twice, the payout case error bit is set and an error is being generated. (Step S472), the payout case error bit may be set when it is detected for the first time that the game ball has not been paid out. Note that “retry operation (or“ retry ”,“ retry operation processing ”) means that the actual number of payouts is equal to the number of game balls paid out in spite of execution of a normal payout process. This is an operation to be executed when the amount is small, and means an operation for executing the payout process again in order to pay out unpaid game balls separately from the normal payout process.

  In the prize ball lending control process, the error bit is checked to determine whether or not to perform a payout operation (one prize ball payout or one ball lending). The payout start shown in FIG. Only in the waiting process. In the payout motor stop waiting process shown in FIG. 45 and the payout passing wait process shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the error bit is not checked. Note that the error bit is also checked in step S459 or the like in the payout passing waiting process, but this check is for determining whether or not a re-payout operation is performed, and is a payout operation (single prize ball payout or 1 This is not to determine whether or not to start ball lending. Therefore, after the process of step S426, S433, or step S434 is performed and the game ball payout process is started, the payout process is not interrupted even if an error occurs. In other words, when an error occurs, the game ball payout process is continued until a point at which the game ball can be cut well (at the time when one prize ball payout or one ball lending ends). The error bits in the error flag checked in step S421 include an error bit indicating that the connection confirmation signal from the main board 31 has been turned off. Therefore, even when the connection confirmation signal is turned off, the game ball payout process is stopped at a time when it is best to turn it off.

  Upon confirming that the ball lending / dispensing process (ball lending operation) has been executed in step S453, the payout control CPU 371 confirms whether or not the value of the unlapped ball lending number counter is 0 (step S457). . If it is 0, it is determined that the ball lending / dispensing process is normally completed, and the process proceeds to step S455.

  In step S457, if the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter is not 0, an error flag (specifically, any one of the payout switch error error 1 bit, the payout switch error error 2 bit, and the payout case error bit) Or one bit or a plurality of bits) is not set (step S475), and the re-payout process is executed. If the error flag is set, the re-payout process is not executed.

  In order to execute the re-payout process, the pay-out control CPU 371 first checks whether or not 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S476). If not set, it is confirmed whether or not 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S477). If 1 bit is not set during the re-payout operation, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations to execute the first re-payout operation (step S478), and 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S479). ) After further resetting the payout ball detection bit (step S480), the process proceeds to step S466.

  In step S477, when it is confirmed that 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation, the payout control CPU 371 performs a process for executing the re-payout operation again. Specifically, 1 bit is reset during the re-payout operation (step S481). If the payout ball detection bit is set, that is, if the game ball is paid out in the first re-payout operation, the process proceeds to step S483. If the payout ball detection bit is not set, the process proceeds to step S484 in order to execute the second payout operation.

  In step S483, the payout ball detection bit is reset, and then the process proceeds to step S466. Therefore, in this case, since 1 bit remains set during the re-payout operation, the first (first) re-payout operation is performed again. In step S484, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations (step S484), 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S485), and the process proceeds to step S466.

  In step S476, when it is confirmed that the 2 bits during re-payout operation are set, the payout control CPU 371 resets 2 bits during the re-payout operation (step S486), and if the payout ball detection bit is set, That is, if the game ball has been paid out by the re-payout operation, the process proceeds to step S483 to try to eliminate the remaining unpaid portion. If the payout ball detection bit is not set, it is determined that the game ball has not been paid out even if the re-payout process is executed twice (the payout number count switch 301 has not detected a game ball). A payout case error bit is set (step S488). Then, the process ends.

  As described above, if one game ball is not paid out even if two re-payout operations are continuously performed in the re-payout process (corrected payout process) related to the ball lending process, a game ball payout operation is performed. As a failure, a payout count switch non-passing error bit (payout case error bit) is set. In this embodiment, the ball lending control process is executed with priority over the prize ball control process (the process after step S431) (see step S422). Priority may be given to execution.

  Next, error processing will be described. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the type of error and the display of the LED 374 for error display. In this embodiment, the numerical value displayed on the error display LED 374 is the same as the corresponding bit of the error flag. For example, the display of “0” corresponds to bit 0 of the error flag. As shown in FIG. 49, when disconnection of the payout number count switch 301 or a clogged ball in the payout number count switch 301 is detected, the error display LED 374 is set to “0” as a payout switch abnormality detection error 1. Control the display. The detection of the disconnection of the payout count switch 301 or the clogging of the balls in the payout count switch 301 is determined by the detection signal of the payout count switch 301 not being turned off.

  When the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is turned on even though the game ball is not paying out, a control is performed to display “1” on the error display LED 374 as a payout switch abnormality detection error 2. Do. If the detection signal of the payout count switch 301 does not turn on despite the rotation abnormality of the payout motor 289 or the game ball being paid out, “2” is displayed on the error display LED 374 as a payout case error. Control. When the prize ball REQ signal is turned on at an improper timing, or when the prize ball REQ signal is turned off at an improper timing, “3” is displayed in the error display LED 374 as a prize ball REQ signal error. Control to display. It is detected in the main control communication process that the prize ball REQ signal is turned on or off at an incorrect timing.

  Further, when the lower pan is full, that is, when the full switch 48 is turned on, a control is performed to display “4” on the error display LED 374 as a full error. When the supply ball is insufficient, that is, when the ball break switch 187 is turned on, control is performed to display “5” on the error display LED 374 as a ball break error.

  Further, when the VL signal from the card unit 50 is turned off, control is performed to display “6” on the error display LED 374 as a prepaid card unit unconnected error. When communication with the card unit 50 is performed at an improper timing, control is performed to display “7” on the error display LED 374 as a prepaid card unit communication error. The prepaid card unit communication error is detected in the prepaid card unit control process (step S754).

  Among the above errors, after a payout switch abnormality detection error 2, a payout case error or a prize ball REQ signal error occurs, the error release switch 375 is operated and an operation signal is output from the error release switch 375 (becomes turned on). The payout control means returns to the state before the error occurred.

  50 and 51 are flowcharts showing the error processing in step S757. In the error processing, the payout control CPU 371 checks the error flag, and the set bits are only the payout switch abnormality detection error 2, the payout case error, and the winning ball REQ signal error (any one of the three). It is confirmed whether it is only a bit, or only two bits out of three, or only those three bits (step S901). If these are the only bits that are set, it is checked whether or not the operation signal is turned on from the error release switch 375 (step S902). When the operation signal is turned on, the error recovery time is set in the pre-error recovery timer (step S903). The error recovery time is the time from when the error release switch 375 is operated until the actual return from the error state to the normal state.

  If the operation signal from the error release switch 375 is not on, the value of the timer before error recovery is confirmed (step S904). If the value of the timer before error recovery is 0, that is, if the timer before error recovery is not set, the process proceeds to step S908. If the timer before error recovery is set, the value of the timer before error recovery is decremented by -1 (step S905). If the value of the timer before error recovery becomes 0 (step S906), the payout switch of the error flags The bits of the abnormality detection error 2, the payout case error and the prize ball REQ signal error are reset (step S907), and the process proceeds to step S908.

  When the processing of step S907 is executed, there may be an error bit that is not set among the bits of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2, the payout case error, and the prize ball REQ signal error. There is no problem resetting error bits that are not in the state. As described above, in this embodiment, when an error (see FIG. 49) that causes the setting of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2, the payout case error, or the prize ball REQ signal error bit occurs, an error occurs. The error is released when the release switch 375 is pressed.

  When the process of step S907 is executed and the payout case error bit is reset, the payout control code is “2” (corresponding to the execution of the payout passing waiting process shown in FIGS. 46 to 48), and the prize ball When the value of the unpaid-out number counter or the value of the ball-lending unpaid-out number counter is not 0, a retry operation for game ball payout is started. That is, when the award ball lending control process of step S756 is executed next, when the payout passing waiting process of step S412 is executed, the repaid process is performed again. For example, if a prize ball payout process has been performed and the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter is not 0, the process proceeds from step S454 to step S459, and it is confirmed in step S459 that the error bit is in a reset state. Therefore, the process for starting the re-payout process after step S462 is executed again, and the re-payout process is executed. Regarding the payout case error bit reset by pressing the error release switch 375, when the bit is set (when step S472 is executed), the payout control timer has already expired. Therefore, when the processing in step S907 is executed and the payout case error bit is reset, the payout control timer = 0 is determined in the determination in step S450 when the payout passage waiting process is executed next. Further, when the payout case error bit is set, the payout ball detection bit is 0 (since step S472 is not executed unless the payout ball detection bit is 0 according to the determination in step S461). Therefore, whenever it is confirmed in step S459 that the error bit is in the reset state, step S462 is executed. That is, the re-payout process is always executed.

  As described above, the payout control means is used to pay out a game ball when the payout number count switch 301 detects no game ball even though the ball payout device 97 pays out a game ball. After performing the correct payout control for causing the ball payout device 97 to execute the retry operation for a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) as a limit, the payout number count switch 301 has detected no game balls. When it is detected (see step S461 and thereafter in FIG. 47), the control state related to the payout is shifted to the error state, and the corrected payout control is performed again on the condition that the error release signal is output from the error release switch 375 in the error state. A correction payout control restart process for executing

  Further, even during re-payout processing in an error state (specifically, during re-payout processing before setting a payout case error and during re-payout processing after the error release switch 375 is pressed), steps S401 to S401 shown in FIG. The process of S404 is being executed. That is, even when an error relating to payout occurs, if the game ball passes the payout number count switch 301, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter or the ball lending unpaid number counter is subtracted. Therefore, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter or the ball lending unpaid number counter when returning from the error state is a value reflecting the number of game balls actually paid out. That is, even if an error related to payout occurs, the number of game balls actually paid out can be accurately managed.

  In addition, even when it is confirmed that the game ball has been paid out as a result of executing the re-payout processing in the payout passing waiting process shown in FIGS. 46 to 48, the payout case error bit is not reset. The bit of the payout case error is reset only when the error release switch 375 is operated (specifically, when the error return time after operation has elapsed) (steps S902, S903, and S907). That is, the payout case error (payout shortage error) state is not automatically canceled based on the fact that the game ball has passed the payout number count switch 301, etc., and the payout case must be processed without human operation. The error is not cleared. Therefore, the game store clerk and the like can surely recognize that a shortage of payout has occurred.

  In step S908, the payout control CPU 371 confirms the detection signal of the full tank switch 48. If the detection signal of the full tank switch 48 is output (if it is in the ON state), the full tank error bit in the error flag is set (step S909). If the detection signal of the full tank switch 48 is in the OFF state, the full tank error bit is reset (step S910).

  Further, the payout control CPU 371 checks the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 (step S911). If the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is output (if it is on), the ball break error bit in the error flag is set (step S912). If the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is OFF, the ball break error bit is reset (step S913).

  In the input determination process described later, the detection signal of the full switch 48 and the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 are also confirmed. In the error processing shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the detection signal of the full switch 48 and the ball signal are detected. The detection signal of the cut switch 187 is confirmed, and control for displaying an error on the error display LED 374 by the 7 segment LED mounted on the payout control board 37 is performed. Specifically, if the detection signal of the full tank switch 48 is output, by setting the full error bit (see step S909), an error signal is output to the error display LED 374 and error display is performed. become. If the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is output, an error signal is output to the error display LED 374 by setting the ball break error bit (step S912), and an error display is performed. On the other hand, in the input determination process described later, the detection signal of the full tank switch 48 and the detection signal of the ball short switch 187 are confirmed, and control for outputting a full tank signal and a ball short signal to the game control microcomputer 560 is performed. Do. Specifically, if the detection signal of the full tank switch 48 is output, the detection signal of the full tank switch 48 is output to the bit of the full tank signal of the output port 1 (see step S934), and the game control micro The full signal is output to the computer 560. If the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is output, the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is output to the bit of the ball break signal of the output port 1 (see step S932), and is sent to the game control microcomputer 560. The ball-out signal is output.

  In the input determination process described later, if the detection signal of the full tank switch 48 is output, an error signal is output to the error display LED 374 by setting the full tank error bit (see step S9009). And the detection signal of the full switch 48 is output to the bit of the full port signal of the output port 1 (see step S934), and the full signal is output to the game control microphone microcomputer 560. It may be controlled to be performed. In the input determination process, if the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is output, an error signal is output to the error display LED 374 by setting the ball break error bit (see step S9012), and an error display is performed. And the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is output to the bit of the ball break signal of the output port 1 (see step S932), and the ball break signal is output to the game control microcomputer 560. You may control as follows.

  The payout control CPU 371 confirms the value of the switch timer to which the state of the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is set, and if the value exceeds the maximum switch-on time (eg, “240”) (step S918). ), The bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 1 in the error flag is set (step S919).

  The switch timer is a counter that is updated in the input determination process in step S752. If the value of the switch timer is less than or equal to the maximum switch-on time, the payout switch abnormality detection error 1 bit is reset (step S920). It should be noted that the value of the switch timer is incremented by 1 when the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is switched on in the input determination process at step S752, and is cleared by 0 when it is off. . Accordingly, the fact that the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 301 exceeds the switch on maximum time means that the payout number count switch 301 is in the on state exceeding the switch on maximum time. Then, it is determined that the game ball is clogged at the disconnection of the payout number count switch 301 or at the portion of the payout number count switch 301.

  Further, the payout control CPU 371, when the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout count switch 301 becomes a switch-on determination value (for example, “2”) (step S921), the ball lending operation flag and the winning ball operation If both the middle flags are in the reset state, the game ball passes through the payout number count switch 301 even when the payout operation is not in progress, and the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 is set in the error flag (steps S922 and S923). . If the ball lending operation flag or the winning ball operation flag is set, the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 is reset (step S924).

  Further, the payout control CPU 371 checks the input state of the VL signal from the card unit 50 (step S925). If the VL signal is not input (if it is in the OFF state), the prepaid card unit not yet in the error flag is displayed. A connection error bit is set (step S926). If the VL signal is input (if the VL signal is on), the prepaid card unit unconnected error bit is reset (step S927).

  In this embodiment, the error display LED 374 mounted on the payout control board 37 installed on the back of the gaming machine is notified that an error relating to payout has occurred. It is notified by the lamp installed on the front side.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a process of a part of the input determination process in step S752 that transmits the input data of the input ports 0 and 1 (see FIG. 41) to the main board 31. In the input determination process, the payout control CPU 371 reads input data of the input port 0 (step S931). Then, the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 in the input data is output to the bit of the ball break signal of the output port 1 (see FIG. 40) (step S932). Further, input data of the input port 1 is read (step S933). Then, the detection signal of the full tank switch 48 in the input data is output to the bit of the full port signal of the output port 1 (step S934).

  Further, when the prize ball operating flag is set (step S935), the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 in the input data is output to the bit of the prize ball count signal of the output port 1 (step S936). .

  It should be noted that all of the detection signal of the ball break switch 187, the detection signal of the full switch 48, and the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 may be input from a common input port. Then, the detection signal of the ball break switch 187, the detection signal of the full tank switch 48, and the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 are collectively set to the bits of the ball break signal, full tank signal and prize ball count signal of the output port 1, respectively. May be output. For example, the payout control CPU 371 reads input data from the input port 0 for all of the detection signal of the ball break switch 187, the detection signal of the full switch 48, and the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301. Then, the payout control CPU 371 batches the detection signal of the ball break switch 187, the detection signal of the full tank switch 48, and the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 in the input data, respectively. It outputs to the bit of the tongue signal and the prize ball count signal.

  If any of bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 6, and 7 of the error flag (see FIG. 49) is set, the bit of the payout error signal of the output port 1 is set to “1” ( Steps S937 and S938). If none of the error flag bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 6, and 7 is set, the bit of the payout error signal of the output port 1 is set to “0” (steps S937 and S939). Since the output port generally maintains the output until different data is output from the CPU side, the output state of the bits of the payout error signal after the process of step S938 is executed until the process of step S939 is executed. The output state of the payout error signal bit is maintained at “0” until the process at step S938 is executed after the process at step S939 is executed.

  That is, when the payout error signal is output (turned on), any of the errors corresponding to bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 6, and 7 of the error flag shown in FIG. 49 has occurred. Means.

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described.
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). .

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and executes a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the variable display device 9 is executed. In addition, a random number update process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a predetermined random number (for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol) is executed (step S706). In addition, a notification control process for performing notification of a plurality of types of information related to the state of the gaming machine is performed using an effect device such as the variable display device 9 (step S707). Furthermore, the serial input / output process which outputs the data set by the command analysis process, the effect control process process, and the notification control process process to the serial output circuit 353, and reads the data received from the input ICs 620 and 621 from the serial input circuit 354. Is executed (step S708). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  For example, when the serial input circuit 102 receives serial data corresponding to the number of stages (bits) of its own circuit, the serial input circuit 102 outputs a reception completion signal to the effect control CPU 101. The reception completion signal is input to the interrupt terminal of the CPU 101 for effect control, for example. The effect control CPU 101 inputs data from the serial input circuit 102 via the input port 103 in an interrupt process started based on the reception completion signal being input to the interrupt terminal. Then, the input data is stored in the reception command buffer indicated by the command reception number counter in the command reception buffer, and the value of the command reception number counter is incremented by one. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 22) is the effect control command stored in the command reception buffer.

  55 to 58 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S601). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control microcomputer 100 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S602). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S603). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  On the condition that the random error check flag is not set (step S610), the production control microcomputer 100 is that the received production control command is an input port data designation command and the random error designation in the EXT data. It is confirmed whether or not the bit is “0” (step S611). If it is “0”, that is, if a random error is detected (see FIG. 12), a random error flag is set (step S612). . Further, a random error checked flag is set (step S613). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S613A. Whether or not the effect control command received by the processing of steps S610, S611, and S613 is an input port data specification command and the random number error specification bit in the EXT data is “0” is used for effect control. It is executed only once after the microcomputer 100 starts its operation. Also, the random number error flag is set only when the effect control command received first from the game control microcomputer 560 is the input port data designation command and the random number error designation bit in the EXT data is “0”. Is done.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not a setting command for performing various settings (for example, date and time setting) of the real-time clock 381 has been received, and based on the received setting command, the various types of real-time clock 381. Processing for setting is executed (steps S613A and S613B).

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing a connection example in the case where the setting processing of the real-time clock 381 is performed by connecting an external device. For example, in the manufacturing stage of the gaming machine, the worker removes the connector on the relay board 77 and removes the wiring between the main board 31 and the relay board 77 when setting the real time clock 381. Then, a real-time clock setting device 500 (for example, a time setting device or a radio timepiece as an external device) is connected to the relay board 77 using a connector, and the real-time clock setting device 500 and the effect control board 80 are connected via the relay board 77. Connect. Note that the real-time clock setting device 500 may be connected to the effect control board 80 by connecting to a predetermined input port (for example, the serial input circuit 102). When the effect control command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 in a parallel signal system, the real-time clock setting device 500 is effected by connecting to the parallel input port provided in the effect control board 80. It may be connected to the substrate 80. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the real-time clock setting device 500 and the effect control board 80 are connected via the relay board 77. However, the real-time clock setting apparatus 500 is effect-controlled without using the relay board 77. It may be directly connected to the substrate 80.

  Even after the introduction to the amusement store (after the introduction of the hall), the date and time of the real-time clock 381 can be adjusted by connecting a predetermined real-time clock setting device 500. With such a configuration, even when the timekeeping operation of the real-time clock 381 has changed after the hall introduction (including after the initial setting), the normal time indicated by the reference data can be restored, and the real-time clock 381 can be restored. Can be operated stably. Further, it is not necessary to provide an input means (for example, a terminal or an input port) for inputting reference data only for time adjustment, and the mounting space of each board such as the effect control board 80 can be effectively used. it can. That is, it is not necessary to provide a special input means that does not need to be used in a normal game. In addition, the real-time clock 381 can be initialized at the manufacturing stage of the gaming machine 1, and it is not necessary to request complicated work from the gaming store side.

  Next, the real-time clock setting device 500 outputs a setting command to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 in accordance with the operator's operation. For example, the real-time clock setting device 500 inputs an instruction to select whether to set a date (year, month, day, day of the week) or time (hour, minute, second) according to the operator's operation. Real-time clock setting device 500 then outputs a setting command for designating date (year, month, day, day of the week) or time (hour, minute, second) to effect control board 80 in accordance with the input selection instruction. Further, for example, the real-time clock setting device 500 controls each setting command for specifying the setting of date (year, month, day, day of the week) and time (hour, minute, second) according to one operation of the operator. You may make it output to the board | substrate 80. FIG. In this case, when transmitting one setting command, the real-time clock setting device 500 controls to transmit the next setting command after a predetermined interval time.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 inputs a setting command (reference data) via the relay board 77, the input driver 102, and the input port 103. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 receives a setting command from an external device (real-time clock setting device 500) by an INT interrupt process. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs setting processing such as time setting of the real-time clock 381 based on the input setting command. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the input of the two enable signals (CE0, CE1) of the real-time clock 381 shown in FIG. The data is output to the input terminal (FCON), and the real time clock 381 is set to the time specified by the command.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting command output by the real-time clock setting device 500. In FIG. 60, a command E0YY (H) is a setting command for setting the year that the real-time clock 381 measures. Note that the value indicated by the EXT data “YY” is set in the last two digits of the year 20YY, which is measured by the real-time clock 381. A setting command for designating the upper two digits of the year may also be provided. In this case, when the command E0YY (H) is input, the real-time clock 381 sets the value (YY) indicated by the command E0YY (H) in the year counter provided in the clock output / calendar function unit 364.

  The command E1MM (H) is a setting command for setting the month that the real-time clock 381 measures. The value indicated by “MM” is set as the month. In this case, when the command E1MM (H) is input, the real-time clock 381 sets the value (MM) indicated by the command E1MM (H) in the month counter included in the clock output / calendar function unit 364.

  The command E2DD (H) is a setting command for setting the date that the real time clock 381 measures. The value indicated by “DD” is set as the day. In this case, when the command E2DD (H) is input, the real-time clock 381 sets the value (DD) indicated by the command E2DD (H) in the day counter provided in the clock output / calendar function unit 364.

  The command E3XX (H) is a setting command for setting the day of the week that the real time clock 381 measures. The day of the week corresponding to “XX” is set. In this case, when the command E3XX (H) is input, the real-time clock 381 sets the value (XX) indicated by the command E3XX (H) in the day counter provided in the clock output / calendar function unit 364. For example, when setting Sunday, the value “00” is set in the day counter. For example, when setting Monday, the value “01” is set in the day counter.

  The command E4HH (H) is a setting command for setting the time when the real-time clock 381 measures time. The value indicated by “HH” is sometimes set. In this case, when the command E4HH (H) is input, the real time clock 381 sets the value (HH) indicated by the command E4HH (H) in the time counter provided in the clock output / calendar function unit 364.

  The command E5MM (H) is a setting command for setting the time counted by the real time clock 381. Note that the value indicated by “MM” is set as minutes. In this case, when the command E5MM (H) is input, the real-time clock 381 sets the value (MM) indicated by the command E5MM (H) in the minute counter included in the clock output / calendar function unit 364.

  The command E6SS (H) is a setting command for setting the second to be measured by the real time clock 381. The value indicated by “SS” is set as seconds. In this case, when the command E6SS (H) is input, the real time clock 381 sets the value (SS) indicated by the command E6SS (H) in the second counter included in the clock output / calendar function unit 364.

  In step S613A, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the MODE data of the received effect control command is E0 (H) to E6 (H) (step S613A). That is, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the received effect control command is one of the setting commands shown in FIG. If it is not a setting command, the process proceeds to step S614. If it is any of the setting commands, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a corresponding setting signal to the real-time clock 381 based on the received setting command. For example, when the setting command E1MM (H) is received, the effect control microcomputer 100 outputs a setting signal for setting the month indicated by the setting command to the real-time clock 381. For example, when the setting command E5MM (H) is received, the effect control microcomputer 100 outputs a setting signal for setting the amount indicated by the setting command to the real time clock 381.

  In step S614, if the received effect control command is a variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S617), the effect controlling microcomputer 100 stores the display result specifying command in a display result specifying command storage area formed in the RAM (step S617). S618). Then, a display result specifying command reception flag is set (step S619).

  If the received effect control command is a decoration symbol stop designation command (step S621), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a decoration symbol stop designation command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command specified by a fanfare (fanfare commands: A000 (H), A001 (H)) (step S623), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the EXT data of the command. Is stored in the fanfare data storage area in the RAM (step S624A), and a fanfare flag indicating that the fanfare command has been received is set (step S624B).

  If the received production control command is a power-on designation command (initialization designation command) (step S631), the production control microcomputer 100 displays an initial screen on the variable display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Display control is performed (step S632A). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols. Also, an initial notification flag is set (step S632B).

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Control is performed for display on the variable display device 9 (step S634), and an initial notification flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is an ending-designated effect control command (ending command: A300 (H), A301 (H)) (step S641), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the EXT data of the command. Is stored in the ending data storage area in the RAM (step S642), and an ending flag indicating that the ending command has been received is set (step S643).

  If the MODE data of the received effect control command is FF (H), that is, if the input port data designation command is received, the processes of steps S651 to S665 and S671 to S681 are performed (step S650).

  In step S651, if the door closed state flag (the flag indicating that the effect control microcomputer 100 recognizes that the game frame 11 is closed) is set as an internal flag, the process proceeds to step S655. To do. If the door closed state flag is not set, the door open / close confirmation process is executed (step S652), and if the door closed state flag is set in the door open / close confirmation process, the door open error notification is requested to start. The door opening error notification flag is set in (Steps S653, S654).

  If the door closed state flag is set, after the door open / close confirmation process is executed (step S655), if the door closed state flag is reset in the door open / close confirmation process, the door open error notification flag is reset and an error occurs. A notification release flag is set (steps S656 and S657).

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing door opening / closing confirmation processing. In the door opening / closing confirmation processing, the production control microcomputer 100 first confirms whether or not the door closed state flag is set (step S685). When the door closed state flag is not set, the door in the EXT data of the input port data designation command (data stored in the command reception buffer but transferred to the register from the command reception buffer) When the opening error designation bit is “1” (corresponding to closing, see FIG. 12), the value of the door monitoring counter is incremented by 1 (steps S686 and S687). When the door opening error designation bit is “0” (corresponding to opening), the value of the door monitoring counter is set to 0 (steps S686 and S688).

  When the process of step S687 has been executed, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the door monitoring counter has reached a predetermined value (10 in this example) (step S689). When the value of the door monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value, the door closing state flag is set, and the value of the door monitoring counter is set to 0 (step S690).

  When the door closing state flag is set, when the door opening error specifying bit in the EXT data of the input port data specifying command is “0” (corresponding to opening), the value of the door monitoring counter is incremented by 1 (step) S691, S692). When the door opening error designation bit is “1” (corresponding to closing), the value of the door monitoring counter is set to 0 (steps S691 and S693).

  When the process of step S692 is executed, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the door monitoring counter has reached a predetermined value (10 in this example) (step S694). When the value of the door monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value, the door closing state flag is reset, and the value of the door monitoring counter is set to 0 (step S695).

  With the above processing, when the door closed state flag is set, if the input port data designation command with the door open error signal “0” is continuously received for a predetermined time, the door closed state flag is reset. . In addition, when the door closed state flag is not reset, if the input port data designation command whose door open error signal is “1” is continuously received for a predetermined time, the door closed state flag is set. When the door of the game frame 11 is opened and closed, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 155 causes chattering, but after the above processing stabilizes the state of the detection signal of the door opening sensor 155, the door closing state flag The set / reset state is changed. That is, the change of the door closing state flag set / reset state is prevented from being temporarily repeated, and as a result, the setting of the door open error notification flag is prevented from being temporarily changed. .

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the payout error designation bit in the EXT data of the input port data designation command has changed from “1” to “0” (step S658), and from “1” to “0”. , That is, when cancellation of the payout error is detected (see FIG. 12), the payout error notification flag is reset, the error notification release flag is set (step S659), and the process proceeds to step S679. The production control microcomputer 100 receives the EXT data of the received input port data designation command (stored in the command reception buffer, but when transferred from the command reception buffer to the register) and the EXT data. It is determined whether or not the payout error bit has changed by comparing the EXT data of the input port data specifying command stored in the storage area (EXT data of the input port data specifying command received last time).

  Further, it is confirmed whether or not the payout error designation bit in the EXT data of the input port data designation command has changed from “0” to “1” (step S660). Is detected, a payout error notification flag is set to request the start of payout error notification (step S661), and the process proceeds to step S679.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the ball break error designation bit in the EXT data of the input port data designation command has changed from “1” to “0” (step S662). When it is changed to “0”, that is, when the release of the ball break error is detected (see FIG. 12), the ball break error notification flag is reset, the error notification release flag is set (step S663), and the process proceeds to step S679. Transition. The production control microcomputer 100 receives the EXT data of the received input port data designation command (stored in the command reception buffer, but when transferred from the command reception buffer to the register) and the EXT data. By comparing the EXT data of the input port data specifying command stored in the storage area (EXT data of the input port data specifying command received last time), it is determined whether or not the ball break error bit has changed.

  Further, it is confirmed whether or not the ball break error designation bit in the EXT data of the input port data designation command has changed from “0” to “1” (step S664). When a break error is detected, a ball break error notification flag is set to request the start of a ball break error notification (step S665), and the process proceeds to step S679.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the full tank error designation bit in the EXT data of the input port data designation command has changed from “1” to “0” (step S671), and from “1” to “0”. "", That is, when the release of the full tank error is detected (see FIG. 12), the full tank error notification flag is reset, the error notification release flag is set (step S672), and the process proceeds to step S679. The production control microcomputer 100 receives the EXT data of the received input port data designation command (stored in the command reception buffer, but when transferred from the command reception buffer to the register) and the EXT data. It is determined whether or not the full error bit has changed by comparing the EXT data of the input port data designation command saved in the save area (EXT data of the input port data designation command received last time).

  Further, it is confirmed whether or not the full error specification bit in the EXT data of the input port data specification command has changed from “0” to “1” (step S673). Is detected, a full tank error notification flag is set to request the start of full tank error notification (step S674), and the process proceeds to step S679.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not a prize ball payout notification flag indicating that the prize ball payout notification is being executed is set (step S675). If the prize ball payout notification flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the prize ball count designation bit in the EXT data of the input port data designation command has changed from “0” to “1” (step S676). When it changes from “0” to “1”, that is, when the payout number count switch 301 is turned on, a prize ball payout notification flag is set to request the start of the prize ball payout notification (step S677). Then, a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 1 second) is set in the prize ball count designation monitoring timer (step S678). The prize ball count designation monitoring timer is a timer for confirming whether or not the prize ball payout has ended. When the prize ball count designation monitoring timer times out, the prize ball payout notification is terminated. The production control microcomputer 100 receives the EXT data of the received input port data designation command (stored in the command reception buffer, but when transferred from the command reception buffer to the register) and the EXT data. By comparing the EXT data of the input port data designation command saved in the save area (EXT data of the input port data designation command received last time), it is determined whether or not the prize ball count designation bit has changed.

  When the prize ball payout notification flag is set, when the prize ball count designation bit in the EXT data of the input port data designation command changes from “0” to “1”, the prize ball count designation monitoring timer has a predetermined value. Is reset (steps S660 and S661). When the payout number count switch 301 is continuously turned on by the processing of steps S660 and S661, the prize ball count designation monitoring timer does not time out.

  In step S679, the EXT data of the received input port data designation command (FFYY (H)) (stored in the command reception buffer but transferred to the register from the command reception buffer) is stored in the next step. When the input port data designation command is received, the data is stored in the EXT data storage area of the RAM for use as the EXT data of the previously received input port data designation command. In the initialization process in step S701, the contents of the EXT data storage area are initialized to 20 (H). 20 (H) corresponds to a case where each error signal and the prize ball count signal are in an off state (see input port 0 in FIG. 12). Then, control goes to a step S661. If it is confirmed in step S645 that the MODE data of the effect control command is not FF (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S666). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S706) in the main process. In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) specifying a fluctuation pattern has been received by the command reception interrupt process. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a flag (variation pattern reception flag) indicating that a variation pattern command has been received is set. The variation pattern reception flag is a command analysis process executed by the production control microcomputer 100 to receive a production control command (any one of 8000 (H) to 8006 (H)) for designating a decorative pattern variation pattern in the variable display device 9. It is set when it is confirmed that it has been done (see step S616).

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. In addition, a value corresponding to the variation time is set in the variation time timer, the process table to be used is selected, and the process timer setting value set at the beginning of the process table is set in the process timer.

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern, and monitors the end of the variation time.

  Decoration symbol variation stop processing (step S803): In response to receiving the ornament symbol stop designation command, control is performed to stop the variation of the ornament symbol and derive and display the stop symbol (definite symbol). If the decorative symbol stop designation command cannot be received, the control for deriving and displaying the stopped symbol is performed in response to the time-out of the variation time timer.

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, the big hit display is controlled. For example, when a fanfare command designating the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed.

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. For example, if a display command indicating that the special winning opening is open is received, the display control of the number of rounds is performed.

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the big prize opening is after being opened (closed), an interval display is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): Control of the big hit end display after the big hit game ends. For example, when an ending command specifying the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed.

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, each variation mode constituting the variation pattern is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the change mode. The effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the process table, and performs control for variably displaying the decorative symbols in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  Similarly to the control based on the display control execution data, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the lighting state of various lamps based on the lamp control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and the sound number Data is output to the audio output board 70.

  The process data shown in FIG. 63 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  Also, the process data shown in FIG. 63 is prepared as high-probability process data and normal process data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is a probability variation state (that is, a high probability / low base state), in a mode corresponding to the probability variation state based on the process data for high probability (for example, as a background color) A decorative pattern variation display is performed (using red). Also, when the gaming state is a normal state (ie, low probability / low base state), in a mode corresponding to the normal state based on normal process data (for example, using blue as a background color) The decorative pattern variation display is executed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the decorative symbol stop symbol (big hit symbol) is determined without distinguishing between the probable big hit and the normal big hit, and the decorative symbol stop symbol is derived and displayed. Further, jackpot display or the like is performed without distinguishing between the probable big hit and the normal big hit (for example, only “big hit” is displayed on the variable display device 9 and “probable big hit” or “normal big hit” is not displayed). Further, in this embodiment, as described above, even if the state is shifted to the probability changing state, the ease of winning the second start winning opening 14 is shifted to the high probability / low base state that does not change from the normal state. . Therefore, in this embodiment, it is normal for the player to check whether the gaming state is a probable state only by confirming the mode of display of the decorative symbols (for example, whether the background color is red or blue). It is possible to recognize whether it is in a state.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the big hit game is finished, until the end of the variable display for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner in which it is not possible to specify whether the state is the normal state or the normal state. (Hereinafter, also referred to as “variable display by common effect”) is executed. In this embodiment, process data (also referred to as common effect process data) is prepared in advance for displaying decorative symbols in a manner in which it is not possible to specify whether the state is a probability variation state or a normal state (FIG. 64). reference). Then, after finishing the jackpot game, until the end of the variable display for a predetermined number of times, the decoration is performed in a manner corresponding to the variable display by the common effect (for example, using yellow as the background color) based on the process data for the common effect. Symbol variation display is executed. In other words, during the execution of the variable display by the common effect, it is not possible to recognize whether the display is in the normal state or the normal state even when looking at the variation display mode of the decorative pattern (for example, the background color is neither red nor blue). The player does not know whether or not the probability change state), and the player cannot specify whether or not the current game state is the probability change state.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a predetermined condition for switching to a specific effect is satisfied (when a specific time is reached) during the execution period of the variable display by the common effect (a specific time is reached), the variable display of the decorative pattern by the specific effect (hereinafter, specified (Also referred to as variation display by effect) is executed. “Specific effect” means that a specific effect change time has passed (or a period other than the specified effect change period) on condition that a predetermined effect change time has passed (or a specified effect change period has been reached). ) Is an effect executed in a different manner. In addition, when a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the game store, the game machines can be used simultaneously in a plurality of gaming machines in the game store on the condition that the specific effect change time has elapsed (or the predetermined specific effect change period has been reached). It is also the production that starts. For example, when a plurality of gaming machines are installed in a game store, when a predetermined specific effect change time (for example, 12:00) elapses, a variation display of decorative symbols by the specific effect is executed, and a plurality of game machines in the game store are displayed. Simultaneous production will be started on this game machine. Further, in this embodiment, as the variation display by the specific effect, the variation display by the specific effect at the time of the probability change executed when the game state is the probability variation state (high probability / low base state) and the game state is the normal state (low probability / low). One of the variable display by the normal specific effect executed in the base state) is executed. In this embodiment, normal process data for normal specific effects used in a normal state (see FIG. 65 (A)) as process data (also referred to as process data for specific effects) for performing decorative display of decorative symbols by specific effects. And the process data for specific effect at the time of probability change (see FIG. 65B) used in the probability change state are prepared in advance. Then, when the condition for switching to the specific effect is established, the decorative pattern variation display is executed in a manner corresponding to the specific effect based on the process data for the specific effect.

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined mission effect on the basis of the process data for the specific effect when performing the variable display of the decorative pattern by the specific effect. Specifically, when performing a mission effect, a message is displayed that prompts the player to establish a predetermined mission (for example, reach in a specific symbol (for example, “3” or “7”)). And when it is determined that it is a big hit internally, it controls to perform the production which establishes a predetermined mission. By performing such a mission effect, the gaming interest can be improved and the player can be expected to have a big hit.

  For example, when the game state is the normal state, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the decorative symbols as a mission effect based on the normal specific effect process data (see FIG. 65A). A text such as “Let's reach 3!” Is displayed superimposed. Further, as a mission effect, a voice “Please reach at 3” may be output. In addition, for example, when the gaming state is a probability change state, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays a variation display of decorative symbols as a mission effect based on the process data for specific effect at the time of probability change (see FIG. 65B). A text such as “Let's reach at 7!” Is superimposed on the inside, and a sound that is one octave higher than the specific effect is output in the normal state, and the decorative pattern variation display is executed. Further, as a mission effect, a voice “Please reach at 7” may be output.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display by specific effect is not restricted to what was shown in this embodiment. For example, when performing variable display with a specific effect at the time of probability change, only perform a mission effect that superimposes a sentence such as “Let's reach 7!”, And output the same octave sound as the normal specific effect. Also good. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects or switches the process data for the specific effect at the time of probability change including only the mission effect in step S824B of the decorative symbol variation starting process to be described later and step S1848B of the decorative symbol variation process. Then, based on the process data for specific effect at the time of probability change including only the mission effect, an effect of superimposing and displaying a sentence such as “Let's reach at 7!” During the variation display of the decorative symbol as the mission effect is performed (step S839- S842, S1836 to S1839, S1857 to S1860).

  Also, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the presentation mode is always changed regardless of whether the gaming state is the probability change state or the normal state based on the elapse of a predetermined specific effect change time. Only when the gaming state is the probability variation state, the display may be switched to the variation display by the specific effect. And when it is in a normal state (low probability / low base state) internally, the specific effect may not be executed. In this case, when the predetermined specific effect change time elapses (see Y in step S822 and Y in S1846, which will be described later), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the gaming state is a probable change state (in a high probability / low base state). If there is (see Y of step S823, Y of S1847), the specific effect is executed by selecting or switching the process data for the specific effect at the time of probability change (see steps S824B and S1848B). If the gaming state is not a probabilistic state (if the probability is low or the base state is low (see N in step S823, N in S1847)), control is performed so as to select the process data for common performance, and the decoration by the common performance Continue to display variable symbols. In this case, when the variation display by the specific effect is executed, the specific effect using only the sound is executed, such as outputting a sound one octave higher than the common effect and executing the variation display of the decorative pattern. It may be.

  Also, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a sound over a longer period of time than the normal time specific effect, based on the process data for the specific effect at the time of the probable change, when displaying the variation of the decorative pattern by the specific effect at the time of the probable change May be. For example, the production control microcomputer 100, when executing a specific production at normal time, over a period in which a predetermined song (for example, a song) ends in the middle (for example, a variation period of one decorative pattern, When a specific effect is executed only during a period in which a predetermined song is not played to the end, and when a specific effect is performed at the time of probability change, a predetermined song is sung (or played) to the end (for example, You may make it carry out over the variation of the decorative design several times. If the decorative pattern change display is executed in such a manner, the gaming state is surely changed depending on whether or not the specific performance is executed over a period in which a predetermined song (song) is sung (or played) to the end. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the possibility is high.

  Further, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may execute the mission effect for a longer period when the gaming state is in the probable state than in the case where the gaming state is in the normal state. In this way, it is only necessary that the production mode is different in some way between the normal production time and the certain change production time.

  Further, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the variable display of the decorative design by the specific effect, the variable display device displays a display different from the case of performing the variable display by the common effect based on the process data for the specific effect. 9, or the lamps 281 a to 281 l, 282 a to 282 f, 283 a to 283 f, 125 a to 125 f, 126 a to 126 f may be lit or blinked in different display modes.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1801). If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is. If it is set, the flag is reset (step S1802).

  If the variation pattern reception flag is not set in step S1801, the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, based on the process data used in the previous variation display of the decorative design, the variable display device. 9 displays the background color and the like. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern was performed using the process data for high probability at the time of the previous variation display, the variation pattern command was not received and the variation display was not performed. In addition, the variable display device 9 is displayed in a mode (for example, the background color “red” is displayed) indicating the probability variation state. In addition, for example, when the variable display was performed using the normal process data at the time of the previous variation display of the decorative symbol, the variation pattern command was not received and the variation display was not performed. Even in such a case, the variable display device 9 is displayed in a mode indicating the normal state (for example, the background color “blue” is displayed). For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern was performed using the common effect process data in the previous display of the decorative pattern, even when the variable pattern command is not received and the variable display is not performed. Then, the variable display device 9 is displayed in a mode (for example, displaying a background color “yellow”) in which it is impossible to specify whether the state is the probability variation state or the normal state.

  If the variation pattern reception flag is not set in step S1801, the production control microcomputer 100 inputs a current time signal (for example, hour, minute, second) from the real-time clock 381, and sets a specific production change time to be described later. You may make it determine whether it passed (refer step S822, S1846). And if the specific production change time has passed, it will be checked whether the high probability state flag mentioned below is set (refer to Steps S823 and S1847). If not set, a predetermined simultaneous effect according to the normal state may be executed. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may display a sentence such as “Let's reach at 3!” On the variable display device 9 or output a voice “Leach at 3”. Further, if the high probability state is set, a predetermined simultaneous effect corresponding to the probability variation state may be executed. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may display a sentence such as “Let's reach at 7!” On the variable display device 9 or output a voice “Let's reach at 7”.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the received variation pattern command is designated as a deviation (step S1803). If it is specified to be out, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a random symbol for determining the off symbol (step S1804), and based on the value of the random symbol for determining the off symbol, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped. A symbol is determined (step S1805). Then, the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol is stored in the decorative symbol storage area in the RAM (step S1806).

  If the received variation pattern command is not an outlier designation, it means that the variation pattern command is a jackpot designation (including a probability variation jackpot designation and a normal jackpot designation). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determining random number (step S1807), and based on the extracted jackpot symbol determining random value and a predetermined jackpot symbol determining table, The left middle right decorative symbols corresponding to (for example, the left middle right symbols are aligned with the same symbol) are determined (step S1808). In this embodiment, the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined without distinguishing between the case of probability variation big hit and the case of normal big hit. Then, the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol is stored in the decorative symbol storage area in the RAM (step S1809).

  Thereafter, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S1810).

  67 and 68 are flowcharts showing the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the common effect execution flag indicating that the variation display by the common effect is being executed is set (step S820). In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the big hit game is finished, the common effect execution flag is set, and when the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner thereafter, the variable display by the common effect is executed. Then, as will be described later, when the variation display for a predetermined number of times is finished, the common effect execution flag is reset, and when the variation display of the decorative pattern is performed thereafter, the variation display according to the probability variation state or the normal state Variation display according to is performed.

  If the common effect execution flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 100 inputs a current time signal (for example, hour, minute, second) from the real time clock 381 (step S821). Next, based on the input current time signal, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes the current time to change the decorative symbol display by the specific effect (hereinafter also referred to as a specific effect change time (for example, 12:00)). Whether or not has passed has been confirmed (step S822). If the current time has not passed the specific effect change time, the process proceeds to step S826. In step S822, the production control microcomputer 100, for example, if the current time does not completely match the specific production change time, but is within a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the specific production change time. You may make it determine with time having passed the specific production change time.

  In step S822, it is not determined whether or not a predetermined specific effect change time has elapsed, but whether or not the current time is a predetermined specific effect change period (for example, 11: 00 to 11: 10). May be determined. And if it is a predetermined specific effect change period, you may make it transfer to step S823, and if it is not a predetermined specific effect change period, you may make it transfer to step S826. By doing so, for example, even when the big hit game is finished after a certain start time of the predetermined specific change period has elapsed (for example, 11:05), with the start of variation of the next decorative design It is possible to synchronize with the simultaneous production by executing the variable display by the specific production. In addition, when the variable display by the specific effect is executed after the start time of the predetermined specific effect change period has elapsed, the specific effect is equivalent to the elapsed time from the start time of the specific effect change period according to the current time. The process start data is read out by delaying the process data read start position, and the variation display by the specific effect is started by delaying the elapsed time from the start time of the specific effect change period.

  If the current time has passed the specific effect change time, the effect control microcomputer 100 is set with a high probability state flag indicating that the gaming state is a probable change state (ie, high probability / low base state). It is confirmed whether or not (step S823). In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of a probable big hit, a high probability state flag is set when the big hit game ends.

  If it is determined in step S822 that the current time has not passed the specific effect change time, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the common effect process data (see FIG. 64) according to the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used. While selecting (step S826), the common effect selection flag which shows having selected the change display by a common effect is set (step S827). Then, control goes to a step S838. That is, in this case, based on the common effect process data, the decorative pattern variation display by the common effect is executed.

  When the high probability state flag is not set in step S823, it is the time when the specific effect change time has elapsed when the variation display by the common effect is executed and the gaming state is the normal state. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the process data for specific production at normal time (see FIG. 65A) according to the variation pattern of the decorative design to be used (step S824A) and changes due to the specific production. A specific effect selection flag indicating that display has been selected is set (step S825). Then, control goes to a step S838. That is, in this case, based on the normal-time specific effect process data, the decorative symbol variation display according to the normal-time specific effect is executed.

  When the high probability state flag is set in step S823, it is the time when the specific effect change time has elapsed when the variable display by the common effect is being executed, and the gaming state is in the probable change state. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the process data for specific production at the time of probability change (see FIG. 65 (B)) according to the variation pattern of the decorative design to be used (step S824B) and changes due to the specific production. A specific effect selection flag indicating that display has been selected is set (step S825). Then, control goes to a step S838. That is, in this case, based on the process data for the specific effect at the time of probability change, the decorative pattern variation display by the specific effect at the time of probability change is executed. If the high probability state flag is set in step S823, the process proceeds to step S824B unconditionally and the process data for specific effect at the time of probability change is not selected, but the high probability state flag is set. In addition, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to execute the certain change specific effect. Then, only when it is determined to execute the certain effect change specific effect, the process may proceed to step S824B to select the certain change effect specific effect process data.

  If the common effect execution flag is not set in step S820, the effect control microcomputer 100 inputs the current time signal (for example, hour, minute, second) from the real time clock 381 (step S828). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the current time is changed to the change display of the decorative symbol by the common production based on the input current time signal (hereinafter, the common production change time (for example, 1 of the specific production change time). It is confirmed whether or not (also referred to as “min)” has passed (step S829). In this embodiment, even if the variation display due to the common effect is not performed, the variation due to the common effect is forced when the common effect change time comes before a predetermined period (for example, one minute) before the specific effect change time. The mode of the variable display is switched so as to perform display. If the current time has not passed the common effect change time, the process proceeds to step S834. In step S829, the production control microcomputer 100, for example, if the current time does not completely match the common production change time, but is within a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the common production change time. It may be determined that the time has passed the common effect change time.

  If the current time has passed the common effect change time, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the common effect execution flag (step S830) and also counts the number of executions of the variable display due to the common effect. A predetermined value (for example, 50) is set in the number counter (step S831). In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display by the common effect, the common effect execution flag is reset after performing the variable display for a predetermined number of times based on the count value of the effect counter. The state returns to the state in which the variation display according to the state or the variation display according to the normal state is executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the common production process data (see FIG. 64) according to the decorative pattern variation pattern to be used (step S832), and sets the common production selection flag (step S833). ). Then, control goes to a step S838. That is, in this case, based on the common effect process data, the decorative pattern variation display by the common effect is executed.

  If it is determined in step S829 that the current production time has not passed the common production change time, neither the fluctuation display by the common production nor the fluctuation display by the specific production is performed, and the game state (whether it is the probability variation state or the normal state). Corresponding decorative pattern variation display is performed. In step S834, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not a high-probability state background designation command has been received (step S834). If it has not been received (that is, in this case, the normal state background designation command has been received), the process proceeds to step S837.

  If the high-probability state background designation command has been received, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the normal production flag indicating that the decorative symbols are to be displayed in a variable manner according to the normal state is set ( Step S835). In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the common effect execution flag is reset after the change display by the common effect of a predetermined number of times is finished, the normal effect flag is set with a low probability even in the probability variation state. Thus, the control is performed so as to perform the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the normal state. If the normal production flag is not set, the production control microphone computer 100 selects process data for high probability according to the variation pattern of the decorative design to be used (step S836). Then, control goes to a step S838. That is, in this case, based on the high-probability process data, the decorative pattern variation display (for example, displaying red as the background color) according to the probability variation state is executed.

  When the high-probability state background designation command has not been received or when the normal production flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 performs the normal process according to the variation pattern of the decorative design to be used. Data is selected (step S837). Then, control goes to a step S838. That is, in this case, based on the process data for normal use, decorative pattern variation display (for example, displaying blue as the background color) according to the normal state is executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S838). Specifically, the process timer in the process data 1 of any of the process tables shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 is started. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control microcomputer 100 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the production control microcomputer 100 controls production devices (production components) such as the variable display device 9 in accordance with data set in the process table. In this embodiment, in addition to the process table used for normal game effects shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, a process table for notification (notification for use in notification of various game states such as error notification). Process table). The notification process table will be described later.

  The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbols. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the variable display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in a variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process tables shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 are stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of lamp control contents executed in accordance with process data (including notification process data) when each production control command is received. As shown in FIG. 69, the production control microcomputer 100 receives, for example, the first ending designation command or the second ending designation command, ends the big hit gaming state, and changes the gaming state to the probable state or the normal state. Are controlled so that only the center decoration lamps 125a to 125f and the stage lamps 126a to 126f on the game board 6 are turned on. In this embodiment, the lamp display control is performed in the same manner regardless of whether the first ending designation command or the second ending designation command is received.

  In addition, for example, when the first fanfare designation command or the second fanfare designation command is received and the winning control microcomputer 100 is a big hit, the center decoration lamps 125a to 125f and the stage lamp 126a on the game board 6 are displayed. -126f are blinked, and each lamp (excluding the dish lamp) 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e on the game frame 11 side is blinked. In this embodiment, the lamp display control is performed in the same manner regardless of whether the first fanfare designation command or the second fanfare designation command is received.

  In addition, when receiving the input port data designation command in which the random number error designation bit is set and performing the random number error notification, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives each lamp on the game frame 11 side (excluding the dish lamp). Effects such as lighting 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e are performed. When an input port data designation command in which the full tank error designation bit is set is received and a full tank error notification is made, an effect of blinking the pan lamps 82a to 82d is performed. When receiving an input port data designation command in which the door opening error designation bit is set and notifying the door opening error, each lamp (except for the dish lamp) 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, An effect of blinking 283a to 283e is performed. When an input port data designation command in which the ball-out error designation bit is set is received and a ball-out error notification is made, an effect of blinking the top frame lamps 281a to 281l on the game frame 11 side is performed. When an input port data designation command in which the payout error designation bit is set is received and a payout error notification is made, an effect is performed such that the top frame lamps 281a to 281l on the game frame 11 side blink.

  When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives an input port data designation command in which a prize ball count designation bit is set and issues a prize ball payout notification, the left prize ball lamp 51a on the game frame 11 side and An effect of blinking the right prize ball lamp 51b is performed.

  On the condition that any error flag (random number error flag, full tank error notification flag, door opening error notification flag, out of ball error notification flag, payout error notification flag) is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 In accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, sound number data 1), control of the rendering device (the variable display device 9 as the rendering component and the speaker 27 as the rendering component) is executed (steps S839, S840). ). For example, in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the variable display device 9, a command is output to the VDP 109. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice synthesizing IC 173 in order to perform voice output from the speaker 27.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control various lamps as production components according to the lamp control execution data 1 (step S841). In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 turns on only the center decoration lamps 125a to 125f and the stage lamps 126a to 126f without distinguishing whether the gaming state is the probability variation state or the normal state. The lamp control signal for setting is set in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S841 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control such that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern command.

  If any one of the error flags is set, the rendering device is controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 excluding the sound number data 1 and the lamp control execution data 1 (steps S839 and S842). In other words, when any error flag is set, when a new variable display of a decorative design is started, the sound effect and the lamp display effect corresponding to the variable display are not executed. The sound output and lamp display effects according to various error notifications (random error notification, full tank error notification, door opening error notification, ball break error notification, payout error notification) are continued.

  In addition, when performing the processing of step S842, the production control microcomputer 100 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data 1 to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. To do. That is, control is performed so that the display at that time (error notification is made) on the variable display device 9 and the image of the display effect of the variable display of the decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed on the variable display device 9. That is, when any error flag is set, when a new variable display of a decorative design is started, not only a display effect corresponding to the variable display is executed, but various error notifications are performed. The notification according to is continued.

  When the process data for high probability is selected in steps S839 to S842, the production control microcomputer 100 decorates in a manner corresponding to the probability variation state (for example, using red as the background color). Executes variable display of symbols. Further, when normal process data is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 executes variation display of decorative symbols in a mode corresponding to a normal state (for example, using blue as a background color). . In addition, when the common production process data is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 is in a state in which it is not possible to specify whether the production control state is the normal state or the normal state (for example, using yellow as the background color). Executes variable display of decorative symbols.

  In addition, when the process data for specific production at normal time is selected, the microcomputer 100 for production control displays “Reach at 3!” While displaying the decorative symbol as a normal specific production (mission effect). And so on. Further, as a mission effect, a voice “Please reach at 3” may be output. In addition, when the process data for specific effect at the time of probability change is selected, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays “7, reach!” While displaying the decorative pattern as a specific effect at the time of probability change (mission effect). And the like, and a sound that is one octave higher than the specific effect during normal output is output, and the decorative symbol variation display is executed. Further, as a mission effect, a voice “Please reach at 7” may be output.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display by specific effect is not restricted to what was shown in this embodiment. For example, when performing variable display with a specific effect at the time of probability change, only perform a mission effect that superimposes a sentence such as “Let's reach 7!”, And output the same octave sound as the normal specific effect. Also good. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects or switches the process data for the specific change process at the time of certain change including only the mission effect in step S824B of the decorative symbol variation start process and step S1848B of the decorative symbol variation process. Then, based on the process data for specific effect at the time of probability change including only the mission effect, an effect of superimposing and displaying a sentence such as “Let's reach at 7!” During the variation display of the decorative symbol as the mission effect is performed (step S839- S842, S1836 to S1839, S1857 to S1860).

  Also, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the presentation mode is always changed regardless of whether the gaming state is the probability change state or the normal state based on the elapse of a predetermined specific effect change time. Only when the gaming state is the probability variation state, the display may be switched to the variation display by the specific effect. And when it is in a normal state (low probability / low base state) internally, the specific effect may not be executed. In this case, when the predetermined specific effect change time elapses (see Y in step S822, Y in S1846), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the gaming state is a probabilistic state (if it is a high probability / low base state). (Refer to Y in step S823, Y in S1847)), the specific effect is executed by selecting or switching the process data for the specific effect at the time of probability change (see steps S824B and S1848B). If the gaming state is not a probabilistic state (if the probability is low or the base state is low (see N in step S823, N in S1847)), control is performed so as to select the process data for common performance, and the decoration by the common performance Continue to display variable symbols. In this case, when the variation display by the specific effect is executed, the specific effect using only the sound is executed, such as outputting a sound one octave higher than the common effect and executing the variation display of the decorative pattern. It may be.

  Also, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a sound over a longer period of time than the normal time specific effect, based on the process data for the specific effect at the time of the probable change, when displaying the variation of the decorative pattern by the specific effect at the time of the probable change May be. For example, the production control microcomputer 100, when executing a specific production at normal time, over a period in which a predetermined song (for example, a song) ends in the middle (for example, a variation period of one decorative pattern, When a specific effect is executed only during a period in which a predetermined song is not played to the end, and when a specific effect is performed at the time of probability change, a predetermined song is sung (or played) to the end (for example, You may make it carry out over the variation of the decorative design several times. If the decorative pattern change display is executed in such a manner, the gaming state is surely changed depending on whether or not the specific performance is executed over a period in which a predetermined song (song) is sung (or played) to the end. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the possibility is high.

  Further, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may execute the mission effect for a longer period when the gaming state is in the probable state than in the case where the gaming state is in the normal state. In this way, it is only necessary that the production mode is different in some way between the normal production time and the certain change production time.

  Further, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the variable display of the decorative design by the specific effect, the variable display device displays a display different from the case of performing the variable display by the common effect based on the process data for the specific effect. 9, or the lamps 281 a to 281 l, 282 a to 282 f, 283 a to 283 f, 125 a to 125 f, 126 a to 126 f may be lit or blinked in different display modes.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S843), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S802). (Step S844).

  FIG. 70 and FIG. 71 are flowcharts showing the decorative symbol variation process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol changing process, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the decorative symbol stop designation command is received (step S1831). If it has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value indicating the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S1843). If the decorative design stop designation command has not been received, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step S1832). If the variation time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value indicating the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S1843).

  If the variation time timer has not timed out, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the process timer by 1 (step S1833) and decrements the variation time timer by 1 (step S1834).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the specific production selection flag is set (step S1835). If not set, the process moves to step S1844.

  The specific effect selection flag is set when the specific effect change time has elapsed and the variable display by the specific effect is being executed. If the specific effect selection flag is set, the process directly proceeds to step S1836.

  In step S1836, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether any of the error flags (random number error flag, full tank error notification flag, door opening error flag, out of ball error notification flag, payout error notification flag) is set. Confirm. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 is in a condition that any one of the error flags (random number error flag, full tank error notification flag, door opening error notification flag, out-of-ball error notification flag, payout error notification flag) is not set. Then, the control state for the variable display device 9 as the production device is changed based on the display control execution data and the sound number data set next (steps S1836 and S1837).

  In step S1837, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a command to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the variable display device 9, for example. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice synthesizing IC 173 in order to perform voice output from the speaker 27.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing in order to control various lamps as production components according to the lamp control execution data (step S1838). For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the effect control microcomputer 100 provides lamp control signals for lighting only the center decoration lamps 125a to 125f and the stage lamps 126a to 126f in a predetermined data storage area. set. Further, when the gaming state is a probable change state, the center decoration lamps 125a to 125f and the stage lamps 126a to 126f are turned on, and all the lamps provided on the game frame 11 side (the dish lamp and the prize ball lamp are turned on). Except) Lamp control signals for lighting 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e are set in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1838 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  When any one of the error flags is set, the rendering device is in accordance with the contents of the process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (excluding the sound number data i and the lamp control execution data i). Control is executed (steps S1836, S1839). Therefore, when any one of the error flags is set, the sound effect according to the variable display of the decorative design and the display effect by the lamp are not executed, but various error notifications (random error notification, full error notification) In addition, the sound output and the lamp display effect according to the door opening error notification, the ball breakage error notification, and the payout error notification) are continued.

  In addition, when the process of step S1839 is performed, the production control microcomputer 100 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data i to the VDP 109, but also issues a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. Output. Therefore, when any one of the error flags is set, not only the display effect according to the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed, but also the notification according to various error notifications is continued.

  Specifically, in steps S1836 to S1839, the control of the effect device is executed in accordance with the content of the process data n, whereby the variable display device 9 performs the variable display of decorative symbols. Note that when the process of steps S1836 to S1839 is executed based on the fact that the specific effect selection flag has been set in step S1835 and the processes of steps S1836 to S1839 are executed, the decoration by the specific effect is performed. The variable display of symbols is executed. Specifically, when the process data for normal specific effects is selected, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays “3 at reach” while displaying the decorative symbols as a normal specific effect (mission effect). Display text such as “Kake!” Further, as a mission effect, a voice “Please reach at 3” may be output. In addition, when the process data for specific effect at the time of probability change is selected, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays “7, reach!” While displaying the decorative pattern as a specific effect at the time of probability change (mission effect). And the like, and a sound that is one octave higher than the specific effect during normal output is output, and the decorative symbol variation display is executed. Further, as a mission effect, a voice “Please reach at 7” may be output.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display by specific effect is not restricted to what was shown in this embodiment. For example, when performing variable display with a specific effect at the time of probability change, only perform a mission effect that superimposes a sentence such as “Let's reach 7!”, And output the same octave sound as the normal specific effect. Also good. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects or switches the process data for the specific change process at the time of certain change including only the mission effect in step S824B of the decorative symbol variation start process and step S1848B of the decorative symbol variation process. Then, based on the process data for specific effect at the time of probability change including only the mission effect, an effect of superimposing and displaying a sentence such as “Let's reach at 7!” During the variation display of the decorative symbol as the mission effect is performed (step S839- S842, S1836 to S1839, S1857 to S1860).

  Also, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the presentation mode is always changed regardless of whether the gaming state is the probability change state or the normal state based on the elapse of a predetermined specific effect change time. Only when the gaming state is the probability variation state, the display may be switched to the variation display by the specific effect. And when it is in a normal state (low probability / low base state) internally, the specific effect may not be executed. In this case, when the predetermined specific effect change time elapses (see Y in step S822, Y in S1846), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the gaming state is a probabilistic state (if it is a high probability / low base state). (Refer to Y in step S823, Y in S1847)), the specific effect is executed by selecting or switching the process data for the specific effect at the time of probability change (see steps S824B and S1848B). If the gaming state is not a probabilistic state (if the probability is low or the base state is low (see N in step S823, N in S1847)), control is performed so as to select the process data for common performance, and the decoration by the common performance Continue to display variable symbols. In this case, when the variation display by the specific effect is executed, the specific effect using only the sound is executed, such as outputting a sound one octave higher than the common effect and executing the variation display of the decorative pattern. It may be.

  Also, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a sound over a longer period of time than the normal time specific effect, based on the process data for the specific effect at the time of the probable change, when displaying the variation of the decorative pattern by the specific effect at the time of the probable change May be. For example, the production control microcomputer 100, when executing a specific production at normal time, over a period in which a predetermined song (for example, a song) ends in the middle (for example, a variation period of one decorative pattern, When a specific effect is executed only during a period in which a predetermined song is not played to the end, and when a specific effect is performed at the time of probability change, a predetermined song is sung (or played) to the end (for example, You may make it carry out over the variation of the decorative design several times. If the decorative pattern change display is executed in such a manner, the gaming state is surely changed depending on whether or not the specific performance is executed over a period in which a predetermined song (song) is sung (or played) to the end. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the possibility is high.

  Further, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may execute the mission effect for a longer period when the gaming state is in the probable state than in the case where the gaming state is in the normal state. In this way, it is only necessary that the production mode is different in some way between the normal production time and the certain change production time.

  Further, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the variable display of the decorative design by the specific effect, the variable display device displays a display different from the case of performing the variable display by the common effect based on the process data for the specific effect. 9, or the lamps 281 a to 281 l, 282 a to 282 f, 283 a to 283 f, 125 a to 125 f, 126 a to 126 f may be lit or blinked in different display modes.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1840). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S1841). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1842).

  If the specific effect selection flag is not set in step S1835, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the common effect selection flag is set (step S1844). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 inputs a current time signal (for example, hour, minute, second) from the real-time clock 381 (step S1845). Next, based on the input current time signal, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes the current time to change the decorative symbol display by the specific effect (hereinafter also referred to as a specific effect change time (for example, 12:00)). Whether or not has passed has been confirmed (step S1846). If the current time has not passed the specific effect change time, the process proceeds to step S1836. That is, in this case, the variable display by the common effect is executed, but since the current time has not passed the specific effect change time, the process of steps S1836 to S1839 is executed as it is, so that the common effect is performed. Is displayed in such a manner that it is not possible to specify whether the state is in a state of probability change or normal (for example, yellow is used as the background color). In step S1846, the production control microcomputer 100, for example, if the current time does not completely match the specific production change time, but is within a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the specific production change time. You may make it determine with time having passed the specific production change time.

  If the current time has passed the specific effect change time, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step S1847). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state (in this example, a high probability / low base state). If the high probability state flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 switches to the normal production process data for specific production (see FIG. 65A) (step S1848A) and sets the specific production selection flag. It is set (step S1849). Then, control goes to a step S1856.

  If the high probability state flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 switches to the process data for the specific production at the time of probability change (see FIG. 65B) (step S1848B) and sets the specific production selection flag. It is set (step S1849). Then, control goes to a step S1856. If the high-probability state flag is set in step S1847, the high-probability state flag is set instead of unconditionally shifting to step S1848B and switching to the process data for specific effect at the time of probability change. In such a case, it may be determined whether or not to change to a specific effect at the time of probability change by lottery. Then, only when it is determined to change to the specific change at the time of the probability change, the process may proceed to step S1848B to switch to the process data for the specific change at the time of the probability change.

  If the common effect selection flag is not set in step S1844, the effect control microcomputer 100 inputs the current time signal (for example, hour, minute, second) from the real time clock 381 (step S1850). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the current time is changed to the change display of the decorative symbol by the common production based on the input current time signal (hereinafter, the common production change time (for example, 1 of the specific production change time). It is confirmed whether or not (also referred to as “min)” has passed (step S1851). If the current time has not passed the common effect change time, the process proceeds to step S1836. That is, in this case, neither the variation display due to the common effect nor the variation display due to the specific effect is selected, so that the processing in steps S1836 to S1839 is executed as it is, in a mode corresponding to the probability variation state (for example, the background) The decorative pattern variation display is executed (using red as the color), or the decorative design variation display is performed in a manner corresponding to the normal state (for example, using blue as the background color). In step S1851, the production control microcomputer 100, for example, if the current time does not completely match the common production change time, but is within a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the common production change time. It may be determined that the time has passed the common effect change time.

  If the current time has passed the common effect change time, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the common effect execution flag (step S1852), and also counts the number of executions of the variable display due to the common effect. A predetermined value (for example, 50) is set in the number counter (step S1853). In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display by the common effect, the common effect execution flag is reset after performing the variable display for a predetermined number of times based on the count value of the effect counter. The state returns to the state in which the variation display according to the state or the variation display according to the normal state is executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 switches to the common production process data (see FIG. 64) (step S1854) and sets a common production selection flag (step S1555). Then, control goes to a step S1856.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the switched process table (specific production process table or common production process table) (step S1856).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the condition that any of the error flags (random number error flag, full tank error notification flag, door opening error notification flag, out-of-ball error notification flag, payout error notification flag) is not set. Next, the control of the rendering device (the variable display device 9 as the rendering component and the speaker 27 as the rendering component) is executed according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step S1857). , S1858). For example, in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the variable display device 9, a command is output to the VDP 109. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice synthesizing IC 173 in order to perform voice output from the speaker 27.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing in order to control various lamps as effect parts in accordance with the lamp control execution data 1 (step S1859). In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 turns on only the center decoration lamps 125a to 125f and the stage lamps 126a to 126f without distinguishing whether the gaming state is the probability variation state or the normal state. The lamp control signal for setting is set in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1859 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If any one of the error flags is set, the rendering device is controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 excluding the sound number data 1 and the lamp control execution data 1 (steps S1857 and S1860). In other words, when any error flag is set, when a new variable display of a decorative design is started, the sound effect and the lamp display effect corresponding to the variable display are not executed. The sound output and lamp display effects according to various error notifications (random error notification, full tank error notification, door opening error notification, ball break error notification, payout error notification) are continued.

  In addition, when performing the process of step S1860, the production control microcomputer 100 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data 1 to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. To do. That is, control is performed so that the display at that time (error notification is made) on the variable display device 9 and the image of the display effect of the variable display of the decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed on the variable display device 9. That is, when any error flag is set, when a new variable display of a decorative design is started, not only a display effect corresponding to the variable display is executed, but various error notifications are performed. The notification according to is continued.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stop process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a decorative symbol stop symbol is displayed is set (step S1870). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1874. In this embodiment, as described later, when a big hit symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S1873. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset in step S1875. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set in step S1870 is a stage in which the fanfare effect is not yet executed although the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step S1871 Without moving to step S1874.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 stops the stored ornament symbol stop symbol (out-of-order symbol or jackpot display symbol (the symbol that is used for both the probabilistic big hit and the normal big hit)). Control to display is performed (step S1871).

  In the case where the big hit symbol (the symbol which is used for both the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit) is displayed in step S1871 (Y in step S1872), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S1873), It is confirmed whether or not the fanfare flag is set (step S1874). That is, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not a fanfare command has been received. When the fanfare flag is set (Y in step S1874), the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S1875) and selects process data corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S1876). Then, the process timer is started (step S1877), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S1878).

  If the jackpot display symbol (the symbol combined with the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot) is not displayed in step S1871 (that is, if the off symbol is displayed: N in step S1872), the production control microcomputer 100 is common. It is confirmed whether or not an effect execution flag is set (step S1879). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1889.

  If the common effect execution flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 100 decrements the common effect number counter by 1 (step S1880) and confirms whether the count value of the common effect number counter is 0 or not. (Step S1881). If the count value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1889. If the count value is 0, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the common production execution flag (step S1882). In other words, after the processes of steps S1879 to S1882 are executed, it is determined to execute the variable display by the common effect, and then the common effect execution flag is displayed when the variable display for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) is finished. Is reset, and the display returns to the state in which the change display according to the gaming state (probability change state or normal state) is executed.

  In this embodiment, the case where the common effect execution flag is reset based on the end of the variable display for the predetermined number of times after the end of the big hit game is shown. Based on the elapse of time, the common performance execution flag may be reset, and thereafter, the variation display according to the gaming state (probability variation state or normal state) may be performed. In this case, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a common production execution flag in the jackpot end production process described later (see step S3982), and sets a predetermined timer instead of the common production number counter. Also good. Then, until the set timer times out, the decorative symbol variation display by the common effect may be executed.

  When the common effect execution flag is reset, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step S1883). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1889. If the high probability state flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the high probability state flag (step S1884). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 reads out a normal production determination random number for determining whether or not to perform variable display according to the normal state (step S1885), and based on the read out normal production determination random number. Then, it is determined whether or not to perform variable display according to the normal state (step S1886). When it is determined not to perform the variable display according to the normal state (N in step S1887), the process proceeds to step S1889. When it is determined to perform the variable display according to the normal state (Y in step S1887), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a normal effect flag indicating that the variable display according to the normal state is performed ( Step S1888) and the process proceeds to Step S1889.

  Even if the gaming state has been shifted to the probable change state by executing the processes of steps S1883 to S1888, the decorative symbol change display is performed with a low probability (for example, with a probability of 20%) thereafter. , The variable display is executed in the same manner as in the normal state (for example, using blue as the background color).

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets a predetermined flag (for example, a common effect selection flag or a specific effect selection flag) (step S1889), and changes the value of the effect control process flag to a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). ) Is updated to a value corresponding to (step S1890).

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open display command has been received is set (step S901). When the special winning opening open flag is not set (N in step S901), the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S902).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the condition that any of the error flags (random number error flag, full tank error notification flag, door opening error notification flag, out-of-ball error notification flag, payout error notification flag) is not set. Then, control of the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) is executed according to the contents of the process data n (steps S903 and S904). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and produces an effect of displaying a character or character indicating that a jackpot has occurred.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing in order to control various lamps as effect components in accordance with the lamp control execution data (step S905). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of the top frame lamp, the left frame lamp, and the right frame lamp to blink, and the center decoration lamp and the LED 125a to the stage lamp. Lamp control signals for blinking 125f and 126a to 126f are set in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S905 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  When any one of the error flags is set, the rendering device is in accordance with the contents of the process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (excluding the sound number data i and the lamp control execution data i). Control is executed (steps S903 and S906). Therefore, when any of the error flags is set, the sound effect corresponding to the fanfare effect and the display effect by the lamp are not executed, but various error notifications (random number error notification, full tank error notification, door opening) Sound output corresponding to the error notification, ball break error notification, and payout error notification) and the display effect by the lamp are continued.

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the fanfare effect in the same effect mode regardless of whether the first fanfare command or the second fanfare command is received. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the fanfare effect by displaying the same character or the same character on the variable display device 9 without discriminating between the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S907). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S908). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S909).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S901), the production control microcomputer 100 produces an effect during the round (round according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the big prize opening open display command. An effect for executing display is selected (step S910). Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S911), and process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S912). Then, the process timer is started (step S913), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the mid-round process (step S805) (step S914).

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing mid-round processing (step S805) in the effect control process. In the in-round processing, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the ending flag is set (step S2901). When the ending flag is not set (N in step S2901), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the flag for opening the special prize opening indicating that the display command for opening the special prize opening is received is set. Is confirmed (step S2902).

  When the flag after the special winning opening is not set (N in Step S2902), the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (Step S2903).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the condition that any of the error flags (random number error flag, full tank error notification flag, door opening error notification flag, out-of-ball error notification flag, payout error notification flag) is not set. Then, the control of the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) is executed according to the contents of the process data n (steps S2904, S2905). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and executes an effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control various lamps as production components according to the lamp control execution data (step S2906). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of the top frame lamp, the left frame lamp, and the right frame lamp to blink, and the center decoration lamp and the LED 125a to the stage lamp. Lamp control signals for blinking 125f and 126a to 126f are set in a predetermined data storage area. Note that the lamp control signal set in step S2906 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  When any one of the error flags is set, the rendering device is in accordance with the contents of the process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (excluding the sound number data i and the lamp control execution data i). Control is executed (steps S2904, S2907). Therefore, when any of the error flags is set, the sound effect corresponding to the effect during the round and the display effect with the lamp are not executed, but various error notifications (random error notification, full error notification, doors) Sound output corresponding to the opening error notification, ball-out error notification, and payout error notification) and the display effect by the lamp are continued.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the production during the round in the same production mode without distinguishing between the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the effect during the round by displaying the same character or the same character on the variable display device 9 without distinguishing between the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S2908). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S2909). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S2910).

  If the flag after opening the big prize opening is set in step S2902 (Y in step S2902), the production control microcomputer 100 performs interval production (according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the display command after opening the big prize opening. The effect for performing the interval display is selected (step S2911). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the flag after the special winning opening is opened (step S2912), and selects process data corresponding to the selected interval effect (step S2913). Then, the process timer is started (step S2914), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806) (step S2915).

  When the ending flag is set in step S2901 (Y in step S2901), it is when an ending command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the received ending command is an ending command (command A301 (H)) for designating a probable big hit (step S2916). If it is an ending command designating a probable big hit, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a high probability state flag (step S2917). In this embodiment, the high probability state flag is set based on the reception of the ending command specified by the probability variation jackpot. A high probability state flag may be set.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the ending flag (step S2918), and selects process data corresponding to the ending effect (step S2919). In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the production period measurement timer (step S2920) and starts the process timer (step S2921). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S807) (step S2922).

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing post-round processing (step S806) in the effect control process. In the round post-processing, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open display command has been received is set (step S2971). When the special winning opening open flag is not set (N in step S2971), the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S2972).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the condition that any of the error flags (random number error flag, full tank error notification flag, door opening error notification flag, out-of-ball error notification flag, payout error notification flag) is not set. Then, control of the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) is executed according to the contents of the process data n (steps S2973, S2974). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and produces an effect of displaying a predetermined character or the like.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control various lamps as production components in accordance with the lamp control execution data (step S2975). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the LED 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of the top frame lamp, the left frame lamp, and the right frame lamp to blink, and the LED 125a to the center decoration lamp and the stage lamp. Lamp control signals for blinking 125f and 126a to 126f are set in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S2975 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  When any one of the error flags is set, the rendering device is in accordance with the contents of the process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (excluding the sound number data i and the lamp control execution data i). Control is executed (steps S2973, S2976). Therefore, when any error flag is set, the sound effect corresponding to the interval effect and the display effect by the lamp are not executed, but various error notifications (random error notification, full error notification, door opening) Sound output corresponding to the error notification, ball break error notification, and payout error notification) and the display effect by the lamp are continued.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the interval production in the same production mode without distinguishing between the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the interval effect by displaying the same character or the same character on the variable display device 9 without discriminating between the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S2777), and switches the process data if the process timer has timed out (step S2978). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S2979).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S2971), the production control microcomputer 100 produces an in-round production (round according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the big prize opening open display command. An effect for executing display is selected (step S2980). Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S2981), and process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S2982). Then, the process timer is started (step S2983), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S2984).

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step S 3971), and checks whether the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S 3972).

  When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S 3972), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S 3973).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the condition that any of the error flags (random number error flag, full tank error notification flag, door opening error notification flag, out-of-ball error notification flag, payout error notification flag) is not set. In addition, processing for controlling the rendering device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) is executed according to the contents of the process data n (steps S3974, S3975). For example, by displaying that the jackpot ends or by displaying a predetermined character on the display screen of the variable display device 9 and displaying a sentence such as “See you!” As a character line, the jackpot ends. Is notified.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control various lamps as production components according to the lamp control execution data (step S3976). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 sets lamp control signals for lighting the LEDs 125a to 125f and 126a to 126f of the center decoration lamp and the stage lamp in a predetermined data storage area. Note that the lamp control signal set in step S3976 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  When any one of the error flags is set, the rendering device is in accordance with the contents of the process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (excluding the sound number data i and the lamp control execution data i). Control is executed (steps S3974, S3777). Therefore, when any error flag is set, the sound effect corresponding to the ending effect and the display effect by the lamp are not executed, but various error notifications (random error notification, full error notification, door opening) Sound output corresponding to the error notification, ball-out error notification, and payout error notification) and the display effect by the lamp are continued.

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the ending effect in the same effect mode regardless of whether the first ending command or the second ending command is received. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the ending effect by displaying the same character or the same character on the variable display device 9 without distinguishing between the probable big hit and the normal big hit.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S3978), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S31979). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S3980).

  When the effect period measurement timer times out (Y in step S 3972), the effect control microcomputer 100 resets a predetermined flag such as a normal effect flag (step S 3981). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a common production execution flag (step S3982) and sets a predetermined value (for example, 50) in the common production frequency counter (step S3983). By executing the processes of steps S3982 and S3983, the decorative pattern variation display by the common effect is performed thereafter until the predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of variation display is completed.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S3984).

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the decorative display is displayed with a common effect until a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the end of the big hit, and the variable display with the common effect is executed. Instead of this, even in the case of a probable big hit, a variation display of decorative symbols according to the normal state may be executed at a certain rate by lottery. Then, when the decorative symbol variation display according to the normal state is performed, the display may be switched to the decorative symbol variation display based on the certain change specific effect based on the predetermined time. For example, based on the fact that the predetermined time (the start time of the specific effect) has been reached, the process may be switched to the process data for the specific effect at the time of probability change selected in step S834B to switch the display of the decorative symbols.

  Next, the notification control process process in step S707 will be described. First, various error notification modes executed in the notification control process will be described. FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of various error notifications and prize ball payout notifications executed in the notification control process. As shown in FIG. 77, the door opening error notification is executed while the game frame 11 is opened (for example, while the detection signal of the door opening sensor 155 is input). When performing the door opening error notification, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs control to blink all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp and the prize ball lamp) 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e on the game frame 11 side. . In addition, control is performed so that a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound) is output to the speaker 27 together with a sound “the door is open”.

  Further, the ball break error notification is executed from the occurrence of a ball break until the ball break state is canceled (for example, while a detection signal of a ball break switch is input). The effect control microcomputer 100 performs control of blinking the top frame lamps 281a to 281l on the game frame 11 side when notifying the ball break error. The full tank error notification is executed from the occurrence of the full tank state of the lower pan until the full tank state is canceled (for example, while the detection signal of the full tank switch is input). When performing the full tank error notification, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to cause the tray lamps 82a to 82d on the game frame 11 side to blink and to output a sound “the bottom plate is full”. In addition, control is performed to display “the bottom plate is full” on the variable display device 9. In this case, when display by a game effect (for example, variable display of decorative symbols) is performed on the variable display device 9, a character string “bottom plate is full” is superimposed on the variable display device 9. .

  Also, the payout error notification is executed from the occurrence of the payout error until the payout error state is canceled. When performing the payout error notification, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs control to blink the top frame lamps 281a to 281l on the game frame 11 side. Further, the random number error notification is executed until the power is turned off after the random number error is detected when the gaming machine is turned on. When performing random number error notification, the effect control microcomputer 100 lights all the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e on the game frame 11 side, as well as a predetermined number. Control is performed to output an error sound (for example, a beep sound). In addition, control is performed to display “error” on the variable display device 9. In this case, when display by a game effect (for example, variable display of decorative symbols) is performed on the variable display device 9, a character string “error” is superimposed on the variable display device 9.

  The prize ball payout notification is executed during a period in which the prize ball payout is being executed. However, since the end point of the prize ball payout notification is determined based on the prize ball count designation bit in the input port data designation command by the effect control microcomputer 100, it is slightly delayed from the end point of the actual prize ball payout. . When performing the prize ball payout notification, the effect control microcomputer 100 blinks the left prize ball lamp 51a and the right prize ball lamp 51b on the game frame 11 side and outputs a predetermined notification sound (prize ball payout notification sound). To control.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the notification control process (step S707) in the main process shown in FIG. In the notification control process, the production control microcomputer 100 performs one of steps S1900 and S1901 according to the value of the notification control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  The notification start process (step S1900) includes an initial notification flag set in the command analysis process, each error flag (random number error flag, full tank error notification flag, payout error notification flag, out of ball error notification flag) and prize ball payout notification flag. This is a process for starting notification of an error or the like based on the above. When the notification is started, the value of the notification control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the processing during notification (step S1901).

  The in-notification process (step S1901) continues the notification based on the initial notification flag, each error flag (random number error flag, full tank error notification flag, payout error notification flag, ball runout error notification flag) and the winning ball payout notification flag. It is processing to do. Further, the notification is ended based on the error notification release flag set in the command analysis process or based on the fact that the prize ball payout notification flag is reset. When the notification is finished, the value of the notification control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the notification start process (step S1901).

  79 and 80 are flowcharts showing notification start processing (step S1900) in the notification control process shown in FIG. In the notification start process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the initial notification flag is set (step S1911). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the initial notification period value in the period timer 1 (step S1912). The initial notification period is a period in which initialization notification is performed in response to reception of an initialization designation command. The production control microcomputer 100 ends the initialization notification when the initial notification period elapses.

  If the initial notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the door opening error notification flag is set (step S1913). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects notification process data corresponding to the door opening error (step S1914). In this embodiment, when performing various notifications, notification process data for controlling the speaker 27 and the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e, 51a, 51b, 82a to 82d (notification process). Data) is prepared in advance. The notification process data will be described later.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a notification process timer (step S1915) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the notification process data 1 (step S1916). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 so as to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound) together with a sound such as “the door is open”.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e, and 82a to 82d to set a lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area (see FIG. 86) is executed (step S1917). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 generates lamp control signals for blinking all the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e provided in the game frame 11. Set to a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1917 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602 to 604. Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  If the door opening error notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the random number error flag is set (step S1918). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to display a random number error display screen indicating that it is a random number error on the variable display device 9 (step S1919). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 selects notification process data corresponding to the random number error (step S1920). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the notification process timer (step S1921) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the notification process data 1 (step S1922). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 so as to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e, and 82a to 82d. (Step S1923). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 generates lamp control signals for blinking all the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e provided in the game frame 11. Set to a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1923 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602 to 604. Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  If the door opening error notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the prize ball payout notification flag is set (step S1924). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects notification process data corresponding to the prize ball payout notification (step S1925). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a notification process timer (step S1926) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the notification process data 1 (step S1927). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 so as to output a predetermined prize ball payout notification sound.

  In this embodiment, when notifying that the winning ball is being paid out, notification is performed using the speaker 27 in addition to the lamp. However, only the notification processing using the lamp is performed and the speaker 27 is used. The notification process using the sound that has been heard may not be performed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control the left prize ball lamp 51a and the right prize ball lamp 51b (step S1928). For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets lamp control signals for lighting the left prize ball lamp 51a and the right prize ball lamp 51b provided in the game frame in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1928 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Are output to the frame side IC substrates 603 and 604. Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  If the winning ball payout notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the full tank error notification flag is set (step S1936). If it is set, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to display a full-tank error display screen indicating that the full-tank error has occurred on the variable display device 9 (step S1937). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 selects notifying process data corresponding to the full tank error (step S1938). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the notification process timer (step S1939) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the notification process data 1 (step S1940). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 so as to output a sound such as “the bottom plate is full”.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e, and 82a to 82d. (Step S1941). For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets lamp control signals for blinking the dish lamps 82a to 82d provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1941 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. To the frame-side IC substrate 605.

  If the full tank error notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the payout error notification flag is set (step S1942). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects notifying process data corresponding to the payout error (step S1943) and starts a notifying process timer (step S1944).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e, and 82a to 82d. (Step S1945). For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the top frame lamps 281a to 281l provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1945 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602.

  In this embodiment, when a payout error is notified, only the notification process using the lamp is performed and the sound notification process using the speaker 27 is not performed. However, the speaker 27 is used in addition to the lamp. You may make it perform notification which was.

  If the payout error notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the ball-out error notification flag is set (step S1946). If it is set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects notifying process data corresponding to the ball break error (step S1947) and starts a notifying process timer (step S1948).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e, and 82a to 82d. (Step S1949). For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the top frame lamps 281a to 281l provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1949 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602.

  In this embodiment, a case where only a notification process using a lamp is performed and a notification process using a sound using the speaker 27 is not performed when a ball break error is notified will be described. The used notification may be performed.

  In step S1950, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the value of the notification control process flag to a value corresponding to the processing during notification (step S1901), and ends the processing.

  FIGS. 81 to 83 are flowcharts showing the notification process (step S1901) in the notification control process shown in FIG. In the notification process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the initial notification flag is set (step S1960). The initial notification flag is set when an initialization designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 560 (see step S635 in FIG. 56). If the initial notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1965. If the initial notification flag is set, the value of the timer 1 set in step S1912 is decremented by 1 (step S1961). When the value of the period timer 1 becomes 0, that is, when the initial notification period has elapsed, the initial notification flag is reset (steps S1962, S1963). If the value of the period timer 1 is not 0, the process is terminated as it is.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a command for deleting the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen in the variable display device 9 to the VDP 109 (step S1964). The VDP 109 erases the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen from the variable display device 9 in response to the command. Then, the process proceeds to step S2010.

  If the initial notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the door opening error notification flag is set (step S1965). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1971. If set, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the notification process timer by 1 (step S1966) and switches the notification process data when the notification process timer times out (step S1967). That is, the process timer setting value set next in the notification process table is set in the notification process timer (step S1968).

  FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the notification process table. The notification process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the presentation control microcomputer 100 performs various notifications by controlling the presentation device. In other words, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 and each lamp according to the data set in the notification process table, and performs notification such as error notification. The notification process table is composed of data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, notification lamp control execution data, and notification sound number data. In the process timer set value, the duration in the sound output state and the lamp display state is set. The effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the notification process table, and controls the lighting / non-lighting state of each lamp in a manner set in the lamp display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. At the same time, the sound output using the speaker 27 is controlled.

  84 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The notification process table is prepared in accordance with the type of error (random number error, full tank error, door opening error, ball break error, payout error). Further, in this embodiment, every time the notification process timer times out, the lighting of the pattern A and the lighting of the pattern B are switched, and the lighting or blinking is controlled.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 based on the notification sound number data (step S1969). In step S1969, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the corresponding notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the speaker 27 to output a sound “the door is open” and a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing in order to control each lamp corresponding to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the notification lamp control execution data (step S1970). For example, in step S1970, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp and the prize ball lamp) 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e provided on the game frame 11 side to blink. Are set in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1970 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the door opening error notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the random number error flag is set (step S1971). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the notification process timer (step S1972), and when the notification process timer times out (step S1973), switches the notification process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the notification process table is set in the notification process timer (step S1974).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 based on the notification sound number data (step S1975). In step S1975, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the corresponding notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the notification lamp control execution data (step S1976). For example, in step S1976, the production control microcomputer 100 turns on all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp and the prize ball lamp) 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, and 283a to 283e provided on the game frame 11 side. Are set in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1976 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the random error flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the prize ball payout notification flag is set (step S1981). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1993. If it has been set, the value of the prize ball count designation monitoring timer is decremented by 1 (step S1982). If the prize ball count designation monitoring timer times out (step S1983), the prize ball payout notification flag is reset (step S1984), and control is performed to turn off the left prize ball lamp 51a and the right prize ball lamp 51b (step S1984). Step S1985). Specifically, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 613 and 614. Then, the process proceeds to step S2010.

  If the award ball count designation monitoring timer has not timed out, the notification process timer is decremented by 1 (step S1986). When the notification process timer has timed out (step S1987), the notification process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the notification process table is set in the notification process timer (step S1988).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 based on the notification sound number data (step S1989). In step S1989, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the prize ball payout notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 so as to output a predetermined prize ball payout notification sound.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing in order to control each lamp in accordance with the notification of winning ball payout in accordance with the notification lamp control execution data (step S1990). In step S1990, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a lamp control signal for turning on or off the prize ball lamps 51a and 51b provided on the game frame 11 side in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1990 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the winning ball payout notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the full tank error notification flag is set (step S1993). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1999. If set, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the notifying process timer (step S1994), and when the notifying process timer times out (step S1995), switches the notifying process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the notification process table is set in the notification process timer (step S1996).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the speaker 27 based on the notification sound number data (step S1997). In step S1997, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the corresponding error notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the speaker 27 to output a sound “the bottom plate is full”.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the notification lamp control execution data (step S1998). For example, in step S1998, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the pan lamps 82a to 82d in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1998 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the full tank error notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the payout error notification flag is set (step S1999). If not set, the process proceeds to step S2005. If it is set, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the notification process timer (step S2000), and when the notification process timer times out (step S2001), switches the notification process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the notification process table is set in the notification process timer (step S2002).

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the notification lamp control execution data (step S2003). For example, in step S2003, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the top frame lamps 281a to 281l provided on the game frame 11 side in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S2003 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the payout error notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the ball-out error notification flag is set (step S2004). If not set, the process proceeds to step S2010. If set, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the notification process timer (step S2005) and switches the notification process data when the notification process timer times out (step S2006). That is, the process timer setting value set next in the notification process table is set in the notification process timer (step S2007).

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the notification lamp control execution data (step S2008). For example, in step S2008, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the top frame lamps 281a to 281l provided on the game frame 11 side in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S2008 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, when a ball break error or payout error is notified, sound output from the speaker 27 is not performed, but when a ball break error or payout error is notified. Alternatively, sound output control using the speaker 27 may be performed.

  In step S2009, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not an error notification release flag is set. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S2010. If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is. In step S2010, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the value of the notification control process flag to a value corresponding to the notification start process (step S1900), and ends the process. Note that changing the value of the notification control process flag to a value corresponding to the notification start process (step S1900) means that error notification is immediately stopped, but at that time, various error notification modes (FIG. 77) is restored to the original state. If the error notification release flag is set, the error notification flag is also reset, so if the decorative symbol change is being executed at that time, it is subject to the condition that no other error notification flag is set. The aspects of the variable display device 9, the various lamps, and the speaker 27 return to the aspect corresponding to the variation pattern (see steps S1836 to S1838 in FIG. 70).

  Various notifications are executed by executing the processing as described above. In addition, since the random number error notification is notified from the gaming control microcomputer 560 to the presentation control microcomputer 100 by the presentation control command transmitted first after the power supply to the gaming machine is started, Regardless of the order, the highest priority.

  In this embodiment, when another error occurs while a certain error notification is being executed (including the case where a plurality of errors occur simultaneously), the error notification mode is set to other error. The error notification mode may be changed. For example, when the door open error notification flag is set during the execution of the full tank error notification, the error notification mode becomes the door open error notification mode (in the program, prior to the processing of steps S1993 to S1998). Since the process of step S1965 is configured to be executed). In that case, the production control microcomputer 100 switches the notification process table to be used. Also, the error notification mode does not change, and error notification for other errors may be started after the currently executed error notification ends. For example, when the ball full error notification flag is set while the full tank error notification is being executed, the full tank error notification is continued, and after the full tank error notification ends, the error notification about the ball full error starts. (Since the program is configured so that the process of step S2004 is not executed when the process of steps S1993 to S1998 is executed. In addition, during the error notification being executed, Because the error notification flag remains set).

  However, when another error occurs while a certain error notification is being executed, the error notification mode may be changed to the error notification mode for other errors at all times. In the case of such control, when it is determined “N” in step S1960, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that all error notification flags (random number error flag, door opening error notification flag, full tank error notification flag, Whether or not the full tank error notification flag) is set is confirmed. Further, as an error notification mode, in addition to an error notification mode (see FIGS. 77 and 85) when each error occurs independently, an error notification mode when multiple types of errors occur is defined. . For example, error notification mode when only door opening error occurs, error notification mode when door opening error and random number error occur, error notification when door opening error, random number error and full error occur The mode of error notification when a door opening error, a random number error, a full tank error, and a ball breakage error occur is defined. For other errors, in addition to an error notification mode when an error occurs independently, an error notification mode when one or more other errors are generated is defined. Data indicating these error modes is stored as a table in the ROM, for example. The effect control microcomputer 100 selects an error notification mode with reference to a table corresponding to the set one or more error notification flags. Then, error notification based on the selected error notification mode is executed. When any error notification flag is reset during execution of error notification corresponding to a plurality of errors, the error notification mode is changed to the error notification mode except for the error corresponding to the error notification flag. Change to

  In this embodiment, the setting / resetting of the winning ball payout notification flag is also determined by the notification control process. However, the winning ball payout based on the set / reset of the winning ball payout notification flag and the setting of the winning ball is set. Notification control may be executed by processing different from the notification control process.

  Next, a lamp control signal set in a predetermined data storage area according to the notification lamp control execution data will be described. FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a lamp control signal output by the serial signal method in the notification control process. As shown in FIG. 85, in this embodiment, notification lamp control execution data for two patterns (pattern A and pattern B) is used for each type of notification. In this embodiment, the blinking display of the lamp is controlled by switching and using the notification lamp control execution data for the pattern A and the pattern B. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the lamp control signal shown in FIG. 85 in a predetermined lamp control signal storage area provided in advance in the ROM in association with the notification lamp control execution data. Then, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a lamp control signal from a predetermined lamp control signal storage area based on the notification lamp control execution data, and outputs it to the serial output circuit 353.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 85, each lamp control signal is stored in a predetermined lamp control signal storage area with the addresses of the output destination serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 added thereto. For example, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 that supplies a control signal to some of the lamps 281a to 281f among the ceiling lamps is “01”, the address “ “0001” is added. In addition, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 that supplies the control signal to the other lamps 281g to 281l among the ceiling lamps is “02”, the 8-digit data body for controlling the lamp is included. The address “0010” is added and stored. Further, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 613 that supplies the control signal to the lamps 283a to 283e of the right frame lamp and the right prize ball lamp 51b is “03”, the address of the 8-digit data body for controlling the lamp is addressed. Stored with “0011” added. Further, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 that supplies the control signal to the lamps 282a to 282e of the left frame lamp and the left prize ball lamp 51a is “04”, the address of the 8-digit data body for controlling the lamp is addressed. Stored with “0100” added.

  When a random number error is notified, as shown in FIG. 85, the control data body is “00111111” or “00011111” in each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 having addresses “01” to “04”. A lamp control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs constituting each lamp are all 1 is output, and all the lamps (excluding dish lamps and prize ball lamps) 281a to 281a provided on the game frame 11 side. 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e are turned on.

  When notifying the door opening error, as shown in FIG. 85, first, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 611 having addresses from “01” to “04” based on the pattern A notification lamp control execution data are displayed. A lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” or “00011111” is transmitted to 614. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs constituting each lamp are all 1 is output, and all the lamps (excluding dish lamps and prize ball lamps) 281a to 281a provided on the game frame 11 side. 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e are turned on. Further, when the process data is switched, the control data body is “00000000” in each serial-parallel conversion IC 611 to 614 whose addresses are “01” to “04” based on the lamp control execution data for notification of pattern B. A lamp control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs constituting each lamp are all 0 is output, and all the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e provided on the game frame 11 side are output. Turns off. When notifying the door opening error by repeatedly performing such control, all the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282e, 283a to 283e provided on the game frame 11 side are blinked at predetermined time intervals. Control is performed.

  When notifying the payout error, as shown in FIG. 85, first, based on the notification lamp control execution data for pattern A, the control data body is “00111111” in the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 whose address is “01”. Is transmitted, and the lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 whose address is “02”. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to some of the LEDs constituting the ceiling lamp are all 1 is output, and only the ceiling lamps 281a to 281f provided on the game frame 11 side are turned on. . At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 whose address is “01” based on the notification lamp control execution data for pattern B, and the address is A lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 of “02”. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to some other LEDs of the ceiling lamp are all 1 is output, and constitutes another part of the ceiling lamp provided on the game frame 11 side. Only the LED is lit. When notifying a payout error by repeating such control, the top frame lamps 281a to 281f and the top frame lamps 281g to 281l provided on the game frame 11 side are alternately blinked at predetermined time intervals. Control is performed.

  When notifying the ball break error, as shown in FIG. 85, first, based on the notification lamp control execution data for pattern A, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 and 612 with addresses “01” and “02” are used. In addition, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs constituting the ceiling lamp are all 1 is output, and the ceiling lamps 281a to 281l provided on the game frame 11 side are turned on. In addition, when the process data is switched, the serial data to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 and 612 having the addresses “01” and “02” and the control data body “00000000” based on the lamp control execution data for the pattern B notification. A control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs constituting the ceiling lamp are all 0 is output, and the ceiling lamps 281a to 281l provided on the game frame 11 side are turned off. When such a control is repeatedly performed to notify a ball-out error, control is performed such that only the top frame lamps 281a to 281l provided on the game frame 11 side blink at predetermined time intervals.

  When notifying a full tank error, as shown in FIG. 85, first, based on the notification lamp control execution data for pattern A, the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 whose address is “05”, the control data body is “00001111”. Lamp control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the dish lamps 82a to 82d are all 1 is output, and the dish lamps 82a to 82d are turned on. At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 whose address is “05” based on the notification lamp control execution data for pattern B. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs constituting the dish lamp are all 0 is output, and the dish lamps 82a to 82d are turned off. When such a control is repeatedly performed to notify a full tank error, control is performed so that only the pan lamps 82a to 82d blink at a predetermined time interval.

  In the ramp control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615, the first bit is an input signal to the lamp 82a, the second bit is an input signal to the lamp 82b, the third bit is an input signal to the lamp 82c, 4 The bit corresponds to the input signal to the lamp 82d, and the fifth bit corresponds to the input signal to the lamp 83.

  When notifying the winning ball payout, as shown in FIG. 85, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00100000” is sent to each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 613 and 614 having addresses “03” and “04”. Sent. That is, a lamp control signal having a logical value of 1 corresponding to the LEDs constituting the prize ball lamp is output, and the left prize ball 51a and the right prize ball lamp 51b provided on the game frame 11 side are turned on.

  At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted based on the notification lamp control execution data for pattern B. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical value of the bit corresponding to the LED constituting the prize ball lamp is 0 is output, and the left prize ball 51a and the right prize ball lamp 51b provided on the game frame 11 side are turned off.

  In the example shown in FIG. 85, when performing notification, the lamp control signal is also supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 of lamps that are not subject to display control. By doing so, it is possible to reliably turn off the lamp that is not the control target at the time of error notification.

  However, when performing various notifications, the lamp control signal may not be output (transmitted) to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 of the lamps that are not subject to display control.

  Next, the serial setting process will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the serial setting process. For example, the serial setting process can be performed in various ways when the decorative design is variably displayed in the effect control process (see steps S841, S1838, S1859) or when various effects are made (see steps S905, S2906, S2975, S3976). This is executed when notification is performed (steps S1917, S1923, S1928, S1941, S1945, S1949, S1970, S1976, S1983, S1998, S2003, S2008). Here, the control of the movable members 151 to 153 is also referred to.

  In the serial setting process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first reads out lamp control execution data (lamp lighting pattern data associated with the variation pattern and motor control data from the ROM (step S950). For example, when the serial setting process is performed during execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the microcomputer 100 reads out lamp control execution data in the process tables shown in FIGS. When the serial setting process is performed in the control process, the notification lamp control execution data in the notification process table shown in FIG. 84 is read.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the display state of each lamp is changed based on the read lamp control execution data (step S951). If there is a change in the display state of each lamp, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts the lamp control signal to which the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC of the lamp to be displayed is added from a predetermined lamp control signal storage area. (Step S952). Next, the header data (1FF (H)), mark bit, and end bit shown in FIG. 17 are added to the extracted ramp control signal, and a predetermined data storage area provided in the RAM is set (step S953). Then, a lamp control signal output request flag is set (step S954).

  For example, when the serial setting process is executed in steps S907, S922, and S929 in the notification control process, one of the lamp control signals with an address shown in FIG. 85 is read in step S952, and the data is read in step S953. It will be set in the storage area.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 reads display control execution data from the ROM (step S955). In this case, for example, when performing the serial setting process during execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the production control microcomputer 100 reads display control execution data in the process tables shown in FIGS. Become. On the other hand, when the serial setting process is performed in the notification control process, since the display control execution data is not included in the notification process table shown in FIG. 84, N is determined as it is in the next step S956. Become.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not any of the movable members 151 to 153 is included in the game effect based on the read display control execution data (step S956). When the movable members 151 to 153 are movable, the production control microcomputer 100 adds a serial-parallel conversion IC address (“06” in this example) of the movable members 151 to 153 to be moved. A control signal is extracted from a predetermined motor control signal storage area (step S957). Next, header data (1FF (H)), a mark bit, and an end bit shown in FIG. 17 are added to the extracted motor control signal and set in a predetermined data storage area provided in the RAM (step S958). Then, a motor control signal output request flag is set (step S959).

  FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a data storage area in which a lamp control signal and a motor control signal to be output are set. In this example, nine data storage areas for storing the lamp control signal or the motor control signal are prepared, and the lamp control signal and the motor are sequentially output to the panel side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605. Control signals are sequentially stored in steps S953 and S958.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the serial input / output process (step S708). In the serial input / output process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether the lamp control signal output request flag or the motor control signal output request flag is set (step S970). If set, the lamp control signal output request flag or the motor control signal output request flag is reset (step S971), and the lamp control signal and the motor control signal stored in the data storage area are transferred to the serial output circuit 353. Output (step S972). In this case, when a plurality of lamp control signals are set in the data storage area, the effect control microcomputer 100 sequentially reads each lamp control signal and outputs it to the serial output circuit 353 in step S972. The output lamp control signal and motor control signal are converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353 and serially transmitted to the board side IC board 601 and the frame side IC boards 602 to 605 via the relay boards 606 and 607. It will be output in the signal system.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the input capture signal output unit 357 to output an input capture signal (latch signal) to the board side IC substrate 601 via the relay substrates 606 and 607 (step S973). . The input IC 621 mounted on the panel-side IC board 601 latches the detection signals of the position sensors 151b, 152b, 153b based on the input input signal being input, and relays boards 606, 607 in a serial signal system. Is output to the effect control board 80. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 reads the input data from the serial input circuit 354 and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the RAM (step S974). In step S 974, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the serial input circuit 354 to read the input data from the serial input circuit 354 after delaying by the time for which the serial input circuit 354 receives the input data from the input IC 621.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the input capture signal output unit 357 to output an input capture signal (latch signal) to the frame side IC substrate 605 via the relay substrate 607 (step S975). The input IC 620 mounted on the board-side IC board 605 latches the detection signals of the operation buttons 81a to 81e based on the input input signal being input, and produces the effect via the relay board 607 in a serial signal system. The data is output to the control board 80. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 reads the input data from the serial input circuit 354 and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the RAM (step S976). In step S976, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the serial input circuit 354 to read the input data from the serial input circuit 354 after delaying the time by which the serial input circuit 354 receives the input data from the input IC 620.

  Next, the execution execution timing of the decorative symbol variation display performed using the variable display device 9 will be described. FIG. 89 and FIG. 90 are timing diagrams showing the effect execution timing of the decorative symbol variation display. Note that FIG. 89A shows the execution timing of the decorative symbol variation display executed after the jackpot gaming state by the probability variation jackpot is finished. Also. FIG. 89B shows the execution timing of the decorative symbol variation display executed after the big hit game state by the normal big hit. FIG. 90 (A) shows the execution timing of the decorative pattern variation display when the specific effect change time arrives when the decorative symbol variation display by the common effect is executed in the normal state. FIG. 90 (B) shows the execution timing of the decorative pattern variation display when the specific effect change time has arrived when the variation display of the decorative pattern by the common effect is being executed in the probability variation state.

  In the case of a probable big hit, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), after executing an ending effect (see steps S3974 to S3777), a common effect execution flag and a common effect number counter are set (see steps S3982 and S3983). To finish the jackpot gaming state. Thereafter, when executing the variable display of the decorative design, based on the fact that the common effect execution flag is set (see step S820), the common effect process data is selected (see step S826), and FIG. As shown in (), decorative pattern variation display by common effects is executed (see steps S839 to S842, S1836 to S1839). In this case, in a manner in which it is impossible to specify whether the gaming state is the probability variation state or the normal state (for example, using yellow as the background color), the decorative symbol variation display is executed.

  Further, after the big hit game is finished, if the decorative symbol variation display by the common effect is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times) without the big hit again, the count value of the common effect number counter becomes zero. (See step S1881), the common effect execution flag is reset (see step S1882). After that, when executing the variation display of the decorative design, process data for high probability is selected based on the reception of the high probability state background designation command (see steps S834 and S836), and FIG. 89 (A). As shown in FIG. 4, the decorative symbol variation display is executed in a mode according to the probability variation state (for example, using red as the background color) (see steps S839 to S842, S1836 to S1839).

  In the case of a normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), after executing the ending effect (see steps S3974 to S3777), the common effect execution flag and the common effect number counter are set (see steps S3982 and S3983). To finish the jackpot gaming state. Thereafter, when executing the variable display of the decorative symbols, based on the fact that the common effect execution flag is set (see step S820), the common effect process data is selected (see step S826), and FIG. As shown in (), decorative pattern variation display by common effects is executed (see steps S839 to S842, S1836 to S1839). In this case, in a manner in which it is impossible to specify whether the gaming state is the probability variation state or the normal state (for example, using yellow as the background color), the decorative symbol variation display is executed.

  Further, after the big hit game is finished, if the decorative symbol variation display by the common effect is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times) without the big hit again, the count value of the common effect number counter becomes zero. (See step S1881), the common effect execution flag is reset (see step S1882). After that, when executing the variation display of the decorative symbols, normal process data is selected based on the reception of the normal state / background designation command (see steps S834 and S837), as shown in FIG. 89 (B). As described above, the decorative symbol variation display is executed in a mode according to the normal state (for example, using blue as the background color) (see steps S839 to S842, S1836 to S1839).

  In addition, when the display of the decorative pattern is changed by the common effect after the normal jackpot is ended, if the current time has passed a specific effect change time (for example, 12:00) (Y in step S822, S1846). Based on the fact that the high probability state flag is not set (see steps S823 and S1847), that is, based on the gaming state being the normal state (low probability / low base state) Effect process data is selected (see steps S824A and S1848A) and, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), the display is switched to the decorative pattern variation display by the specific effect at the normal time and executed (see steps S839 to S842, S1836 to S1839). ). For example, a sentence such as “Let's reach at 3!” Is superimposed and displayed during the variation display of the decorative pattern as the variation display by the specific effect at the normal time (mission effect). Further, as a mission effect, a voice “Please reach at 3” may be output.

  In addition, when the display change of the decorative pattern by the common effect is executed after the probable big hit is over, if the current time has passed a specific effect change time (for example, 12:00) (Y of step S822, Y of S1846) Based on the fact that the high probability state flag is set (see steps S823 and S1847), that is, based on the fact that the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability / low base state), Produce process data is selected (see steps S824B and S1848B) and, as shown in FIG. 90B, the display is switched to a decorative pattern change display by a specific effect at the time of probability change (see steps S839 to S842, S1836 to S1839). ). For example, as a change display by a specific effect (mission effect) at the time of a certain change, a text such as “Let's reach 7!” Is superimposed and displayed during the change display of the decorative pattern, and one octave than the common effect and the normal specific effect A high sound is output and the decorative pattern variation display is executed. Further, as a mission effect, a voice “Please reach at 7” may be output.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, in the production control microcomputer 100, the time measurement result by the real time clock 381 satisfies a predetermined condition (the current time has passed the specific production change time). Basically, the effect mode of the decorative pattern variation display is changed to the variation display by the specific effect. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability / low ace state). In addition, when the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the decorative pattern in a variable manner, the effect control microcomputer 100 cannot recognize whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state (in a variation display mode by a common effect). The variable display can be executed. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the probability display different from the variation display due to the common effect on the condition that the game state is determined to be the probability variation state when executing the variation display of the decorative pattern due to the common effect. When changing to a specific production. Further, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the probability variation state (that is, when the gaming state is the normal state), the normal state specific effect different from the variation display by the common effect is changed. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode according to the internal state of the gaming machine and execute the variation display of the decorative pattern without being limited to the improvement of the performance effect by simply switching the performance mode based on the period. The effect and interest for the player can be further improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the time measurement result by the real time clock 381 satisfies a specific condition that arrives before a predetermined condition arrives (the current time is the common production change time). Whether or not has passed. Further, when it is determined that the current time has passed the common effect change time, the effect control microcomputer 100 starts execution of the decorative pattern variation display using the common effect. Therefore, even when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to realize the switching of the effect mode of the game effect according to the internal state of the gaming machine, and to improve the effect of the game and the interest for the player Can do.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control means determines whether any one or more of the plurality of state detection signals input to the input port unit have changed, and the plurality of states When it is determined that at least one of the detection signals has changed, a plurality of state detection signals input to the input port unit are collectively transmitted as a command, and the effect control means performs game control. It is configured to determine which of a plurality of types of information related to the state of the gaming machine has changed based on the command transmitted by the means, and to notify the electrical component corresponding to the information related to the determined state of the gaming machine Therefore, the control burden of the game control means does not become heavy when various notifications are performed by electric parts. In addition, since the plurality of state detection signals are transmitted from the main board 31 on the condition that any one or more of the plurality of state detection signals input to the input port 1 have changed, the main board 31 It is difficult to grasp the control state of the game control microcomputer 560 based on the signal transmitted from the computer, and as a result, there is a high possibility that fraud can be prevented.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the setting command input from the real time clock setting device 500 via the command line when the real time clock setting device 500 is connected to the command line. Based on this, the reference data used by the real time clock 381 for the clocking operation is set. Therefore, it is possible to reset the time when the timekeeping operation of the real time clock 381 is shifted. In addition, since a setting command can be input using an existing command line, there is no need to provide a dedicated terminal or input port for resetting the time of the real-time clock 381. For example, in the case where an effect is executed simultaneously by a plurality of gaming machines based on the time counted by the real-time clock 381, the timing of the effects of the plurality of gaming machines is shifted while ensuring the versatility of each board mounted on the gaming machine. Can be prevented.

  As a method for resetting the time of the real-time clock mounted on the gaming machine, the gaming machine is provided with a function as a radio wave clock, such as a gaming machine described in JP-A-2004-357726. In addition, there is a method in which the time is reset based on a reference signal received by the radio wave standard antenna. However, if the gaming machine is provided with a function as a radio clock, a wiring pattern for a radio wave standard antenna or the like must be formed on a board (for example, an effect control board) mounted on the gaming machine. For this reason, the wiring pattern of the board differs between a gaming machine of a model having a function as a radio timepiece and a gaming machine of a model that does not, and the versatility of the board between gaming machines decreases. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the setting command can be input using the existing command line to reset the time of the real-time clock 381, so that only the program is changed (for example, the production control micro This can be done by simply changing the program for the computer 100.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot game is ended, the case where the decorative display variation display by the common effect is executed unconditionally until the end of the predetermined number of variations display is described. It may be possible to determine whether or not to perform variable display by common effects by lottery. For example, if the production control microcomputer 100 resets a predetermined flag in the jackpot end production process shown in FIG. 76 (see step S3981), does the production control microcomputer 100 perform variable display based on the common production determination random number? It may be determined whether or not. Then, only when it is determined to perform variable display by the common effect, the common effect execution flag may be set (see step S3982) and a predetermined value may be set in the common effect number counter (see step S3983). . In this case, when the game state is controlled to a probable change state, when a variation display of a decorative symbol is performed after the big hit game ends, a variation display (for example, a background color “yellow”) is performed by a common effect. And a case where a change display (for example, background color “red”) corresponding to the probability change state is performed. In addition, when the gaming state is controlled to the normal state, when the decorative symbol variation display is performed after the end of the big hit game, the variation display (for example, the background color “yellow”) by the common effect is performed. In some cases, a variable display (for example, background color “blue”) according to the normal state is performed.

  In addition, when it is determined whether or not the variable display due to the common effect is to be performed by lottery, if the game state is a probable variation state, the variable display due to the common effect is displayed at a higher rate than in the normal state. You may make it decide to do. In this case, for example, a common effect determination table for determining whether or not to perform a variable display with a common effect is provided, and a common effect determination table for probability change used in the probability change state and a common common effect determination used in the normal state. And a work table. Further, in the jackpot end effect process, when a predetermined flag is reset (see step S3981), it is determined whether or not the high probability state flag is set, and if it is set, the probability change common effect determination table is selected. If it is not set, the common effect determining table may be selected. Then, based on a predetermined common effect determination random number and the selected common effect determination table, it may be determined whether or not to perform variable display by the common effect. In this case, for example, when the table for determining the common effect at the time of probability change is used, it is configured to determine that the variation display by the common effect is performed at a rate of 80%, and when the table for determining the common effect at the normal time is used. May be configured to determine that the variable display by the common effect is performed at a rate of 30%.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the decorative symbol variation display by the common effect is being executed, the current time has passed the specific effect change time, and the game state is in the probability variation state. Although the case where the display is switched to the variation display of the decorative pattern by the specific effect has been described, the display may be switched to the display of the decorative pattern variation by the specific effect at the time of the probability change, on condition that the operation by the player is performed.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a decorative symbol variation start process in the case of switching to a decorative symbol variation display based on a certain effect at the time of probability change on the condition that an operation by the player is further performed. 91, the processes in steps S820 to S823 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  If the high probability state flag is set in step S823, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the variable display device 9 to display a specific production change screen indicating that it is a change time to the specific production (step S823A). Encourage the player to operate. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 prompts the player to perform an operation by displaying a specific effect change screen including characters such as “operate the operation button”.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not an operation signal is input from the operation buttons 81a to 81e (step S823B). If no operation signal is input, the process proceeds to step S824A. In other words, in this case, although the current time has passed the specific effect change time, since the player has not yet performed an operation, control is performed so as to perform a variable display of decorative symbols by the normal specific effect. If an operation signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S824B. That is, in this case, since the current time has passed the specific effect change time and an operation by the player has been performed, control is performed so as to perform a variation display of the decorative symbol by the specific effect at the time of probability change.

  Note that the processing after Steps S824A and S824B in the decorative symbol variation start processing is the same as those processing shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a decorative symbol variation process in the case of switching to a decorative symbol variation display based on a specific effect at the time of probability change on the condition that an operation by the player is further performed. In FIG. 92, the processing up to step S1847 in the decorative symbol variation processing is the same as those processing shown in FIGS.

  When the high probability state flag is set in step S1847, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the variable display device 9 to superimpose and display the specific effect change screen indicating the change time to the specific effect (step S1847A). , Prompt the player to operate. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 prompts the player to perform an operation by superimposing a specific effect change screen including characters such as “operate the operation button”.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not an operation signal is input from the operation buttons 81a to 81e (step S1847B). If no operation signal is input, the process proceeds to step S1848A. In other words, in this case, although the current time has passed the specific effect change time, since the player has not yet performed an operation, control is performed so as to perform a variable display of decorative symbols by the normal specific effect. If an operation signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S1848B. That is, in this case, since the current time has passed the specific effect change time and an operation by the player has been performed, control is performed so as to switch to the decorative symbol variation display by the specific effect at the time of probability change.

  In addition, the process after step S1848A and S1848B in a decoration design change start process is the same as those processes shown in FIG.

  As described above, with the configuration shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the decorative symbol variation display on the condition that the operation signals are input from the operation buttons 81a to 81e. Change to a variable display with specific effects. Therefore, unless the operation buttons 81a to 81e are operated, the variation display by the specific variation time specific effect corresponding to the internal state is not executed, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, when it is determined that the current time has passed the specific effect change time, the specific effect change screen is displayed (or superimposed), and the operation buttons 81a to 81e are displayed to the player. Although the case where the operation is prompted is shown, the specific effect change screen is displayed (or superimposed) immediately before the specific effect change time (for example, 10 seconds before), and the player is prompted to operate the operation buttons 81a to 81e. May be. At this time, when the operation is performed from the operation buttons 81a to 81e (when an operation signal is input) on the condition that the state is a certain change state, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the type of the specific effect. The random number for determining the specific effect for reading may be read, and based on the read random number for determining the specific effect, it may be determined whether to change to the variable display by the specific effect at the time of probability change or to change to the variable display by the specific effect at the normal time . In addition, for example, when the operation is performed from the operation buttons 81a to 81e on the condition that the operation is in the probability change state, the probability change is performed at a higher rate than when the operation is not performed from the operation buttons 81a to 81e. It may be determined that the display is changed to the variable display by the time specific effect.

  In this embodiment, as an error notification, a random error, a full tank error, a door opening error, a ball break error, and a payout error are exemplified, but other errors related to the state of the gaming machine are notified. Also good. For example, even though the game control means does not control to open the special winning opening (for example, when the value of the special symbol process flag is not 4 to 7 corresponding to steps S304 to S307 (see FIG. 21)). When the detection signal of the count switch 23 is turned on, an abnormal winning signal indicating that fact is transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means responds to the reception of the abnormal winning signal with a random error or a full error. The error notification may be performed in a manner different from the error notification manner of the door opening error, the ball break error, and the payout error. When it is determined whether or not the control for opening the special winning opening is performed based on the value of the special symbol process flag, since the determination can be made with one data, the control burden on the game control means is light.

  Further, in this embodiment, various notifications are executed by the lamp, the speaker 27 and the variable display device 9, and when executed by the variable display device 9, the notification display and the effect display are displayed in a superimposed manner. However, for example, notification may be displayed in a part of the display area of the variable display device 9 without being superimposed.

  In each of the embodiments, the effect control command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 and the like by the parallel signal method. However, the effect control command may be transmitted by the parallel signal method.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 93, the prize ball count signal output from the payout control board 37 to the main board 321 may be branched at the main board 31 and input to the information terminal board 34. A signal from the payout control board 37 including a prize ball count signal is input to the CPU 56 via the input port 571 in the I / O port unit 57 (see FIG. 6).

  Note that all external outputs (information output signals such as prize ball information signals and ball lending number signals) to the information terminal board 34 may be output from the CPU 56 of the main board 31 to the information terminal board 34. In this case, the CPU 56 may input a signal related to a prize ball such as a prize ball information signal among the information output signals to the connector 342 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the information terminal board 34 includes two connectors 341 and 342 on the input side (for input from the main board 31 and for input from the payout control board 37). However, the information terminal board 34 may be provided with only one connector, and all the information output signals may be collectively input from the CPU 56.

  As shown in FIG. 93, the CPU 56 may output a door opening / closing signal to the information terminal board 34 via the output port 572 in the I / O port unit 57. When configured as shown in FIG. 93, no prize ball count signal and door open / close signal are output from the payout control board 37 to the information terminal board 34. Further, the door opening / closing signal may be branched at the main board 31 and input to the information terminal board 34. As shown in FIG. 7, in the dispensing control board 37, the door opening / closing signal (the detection signal of the door opening sensor 155) is not input to the dispensing control microcomputer 370 but is output to the main board 31. It is preferable. The prize ball count signal output from the payout control board 37 to the main board 321 may be a signal that is turned on once every time the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is output ten times. .

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, after the variable display by the common effect is executed for a predetermined number of times, the decorative symbols are displayed in accordance with the game state (probability change state or normal state). Instead, the same mode of variation display may be performed. That is, the decorative symbol variation display may be executed so as not to notify at all whether the gaming state is the probability variation state or the normal state.

  For example, in the first embodiment, a case has been described in which it is not possible to recognize whether the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a normal state by executing a variable display with a common effect after the jackpot ends. Regardless of whether the gaming state is the probability variation state or the normal state, the variation display may be executed in the production mode corresponding to the normal time. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether the game state is the probability variation state or the normal state so that it is not notified at all whether it is the probability variation state or the normal state.

  Hereinafter, a second embodiment in the case where the game state is not surely notified whether the game state is the probability change state or the normal state will be described. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a normal state, and the decorative symbol variation display (for example, the background color “blue” is used based on the normal process data). (Variable display), the variable display is executed in a state in which it is impossible to specify whether the gaming state is a probable variation state or a normal state.

  In the present embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, in this embodiment, the process of step S820 shown in the first embodiment is not executed in the decorative symbol variation start process. That is, it is not confirmed whether or not the common effect execution flag is set. Therefore, in this embodiment, the processes of steps S828 to S837 shown in the first embodiment are not executed. In FIG. 94, the processes in steps S821 and S822 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  If the current time has not passed the specific effect change time in step S822, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects normal process data (see FIG. 63) according to the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used (see FIG. 63). Step S822A). Then, control goes to a step S838. That is, in this case, based on the common effect process data, the decorative pattern variation display by the common effect is executed.

  If the current time has passed the specific effect change time in step S822, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step S822B). If the high probability state flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the high-probability specific production determination table as the specific production determination table for determining the type of specific production (step S822C). . If the high probability state flag is not set, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the normal effect determination table as the specific effect determination table for determining the type of the specific effect (step S822D).

  In this embodiment, as a specific effect determination table for determining the type of specific effect, a high probability specific effect determination table used for a probability variation state (high probability / low base state), and a normal state (low probability / A normal-specific effect determination table used for the low base state is prepared in advance. Then, when the gaming state is controlled to the probability variation state, by using the high-probability specific effect determination table, a variation display of the decorative pattern by the certain variation specific effect at a higher rate than the normal state (FIG. 65 (B)). (Variable display using process data for specific production at the time of probability change shown in FIG. 2). For example, in the probability variation state, it is determined to use the high-probability specific effect determination table to display the decorative pattern variation display by the probability variation specific effect at a rate of 80%. In the probability variation state, the variation display of the decorative pattern by the normal specific effect at a rate of 20% using the table for determining the specific effect at high probability (the process data for the specific effect at the time of probability variation shown in FIG. 65A) is used. Decide to perform variable display. In addition, for example, in the normal state, it is determined to display the decorative pattern with the specific effect at the time of probability change at a rate of 30% using the normal-specific effect determination table. Then, in the normal state, it is determined that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the normal specific effect at a rate of 70% using the normal specific effect determination table.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a specific production determination random number for determining the type of the specific production, the extracted specific production determination random number, the specific production determination table selected in steps S822C and S822D, and Based on this, the type of specific effect is determined (step S822E).

  Next, when it is determined not to perform the decorative display of the decorative pattern due to the specific effect at the time of certain change (that is, when it is determined to perform the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the normal specific effect) (N in step S822F), The effect control microcomputer 100 selects the normal specific effect process data (see FIG. 65A) according to the variation pattern of the decorative design to be used (step S822G). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a specific production change flag indicating that it has been decided to perform the variable display of the decorative symbol by the specific production (step S822H), and proceeds to step S838. When it is decided to display the variation of the decorative pattern by the specific effect at the time of certain change (Y in step S822F), the production control microcomputer 100 uses the specific pattern at the time of certain variation according to the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used. Process data (see FIG. 65B) is selected (step S822I). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a specific production change flag indicating that it has been decided to perform the variable display of the decorative symbol by the specific production (step S822J), and proceeds to step S838.

  In step S822G, the production control microcomputer 100 selects, for example, normal-time specific production process data shown in FIG. Then, when the process data for specific production at the normal time is selected, the production control microcomputer 100, for example, writes a sentence such as “Let's reach 3!” While displaying the decorative pattern as a mission production. Overlay display. Further, as a mission effect, a voice “Please reach at 3” may be output.

  In step S822I, the production control microcomputer 100 selects, for example, the process data for the specific production at the time of probability change shown in FIG. Then, when the process data for specific effect at the time of probability change is selected, the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, writes a sentence such as “Let's reach at 7!” During the variation display of the decorative pattern as a mission effect. In addition to superimposing display, a sound that is one octave higher than normal is output, and decorative pattern variation display is executed. Further, as a mission effect, a voice “Please reach at 7” may be output.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display by specific effect is not restricted to what was shown in this embodiment. For example, when performing variable display with a specific effect at the time of probability change, only perform a mission effect that superimposes a sentence such as “Let's reach 7!”, And output the same octave sound as the normal specific effect. Also good. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects or switches the process data for the specific change process at the time of certain change including only the mission effect in step S824B of the decorative symbol variation start process and step S1848B of the decorative symbol variation process. Then, based on the process data for specific effect at the time of probability change including only the mission effect, an effect of superimposing and displaying a sentence such as “Let's reach at 7!” During the variation display of the decorative symbol as the mission effect is performed (step S839- S842, S1836 to S1839, S1857 to S1860).

  Also, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the presentation mode is always changed regardless of whether the gaming state is the probability change state or the normal state based on the elapse of a predetermined specific effect change time. When a certain condition (for example, lottery) is satisfied, the display may be switched to a variable display by a specific effect. And when it is a normal state internally (low probability / low base state), you may make low the ratio which performs a specific production. In this case, when the predetermined specific effect change time elapses (see Y in step S822, Y in S1846), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the gaming state is a probabilistic state (if it is a high probability / low base state). (Refer to Y of step S823, Y of S1847)), a lottery using a predetermined probability change specific effect determination table for determining whether or not to execute the probability change specific effect is performed, and the probability change specific effect is executed. Decide whether or not to do. If it is decided to execute the specific change time specific effect, the specific effect is executed by selecting or switching the process data for the specific change time specific effect (see steps S824B and S1848B). Further, if the gaming state is not a probability variation state (if the probability is low / low base state (refer to N in step S823, N in step S1847)), a predetermined value for determining whether or not to execute a certain effect at the time of probability variation is determined. A lottery is performed using the normal specific effect determining table, and it is determined whether or not to execute the specific effect at the time of probability change. In the case of the normal state, it is determined to execute the certain change time specific effect with a lower probability than the case where it is determined to execute the certain change time specific effect in the probability change state. When it is decided to execute the specific effect at the time of probability change, the specific effect is executed by selecting or switching the process data for the specific effect at the time of probability change (see steps S824A and S1848B). Further, when it is determined not to execute the specific effect at the time of the probability change, control is performed so that the normal process data is selected, and the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the normal state is continued. In addition, in this case, when executing the variable display by the specific effect, the specific display using only the sound, such as outputting the sound one octave higher than the normal display according to the normal state and executing the decorative pattern variable display. An effect may be executed.

  Also, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a sound over a longer period of time than the normal time specific effect, based on the process data for the specific effect at the time of the probable change, when displaying the variation of the decorative pattern by the specific effect at the time of the probable change May be. For example, the production control microcomputer 100, when executing a specific production at normal time, over a period in which a predetermined song (for example, a song) ends in the middle (for example, a variation period of one decorative pattern, When a specific effect is executed only during a period in which a predetermined song is not played to the end, and when a specific effect is performed at the time of probability change, a predetermined song is sung (or played) to the end (for example, You may make it carry out over the variation of the decorative design several times. If the decorative pattern change display is executed in such a manner, the gaming state is surely changed depending on whether or not the specific performance is executed over a period in which a predetermined song (song) is sung (or played) to the end. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the possibility is high.

  Further, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may execute the mission effect for a longer period when the gaming state is in the probable state than in the case where the gaming state is in the normal state. In this way, it is only necessary that the production mode is different in some way between the normal production time and the certain change production time.

  In this embodiment, the process of steps S838 to S844 of the decorative symbol variation start process is the same as those processes shown in the first embodiment.

  FIGS. 95 and 96 are flowcharts showing the decorative symbol variation process (step S802) according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 95, the processes in steps S1831 to S1834 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  When the change time timer is decremented by 1, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the specific effect change flag is set (step S1835A). If not set, the process moves to step S1844.

  That the specific effect change flag is set is when the specific effect change time has elapsed and the variable display by the specific effect is being executed. If the specific effect change flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1836.

  In FIG. 95, the processes in steps S1836 to S1843 are the same as those described in the first embodiment. In the case where the process proceeds to step S1836 based on the fact that the specific effect change flag has been set in step S1835A and the processes in steps S1836 to S1839 are executed, the decoration based on the specific effect is performed based on the process data for the specific effect. The variable display of symbols is executed. For example, when the production control microcomputer 100 selects the process data for specific production at the normal time, the production control microcomputer 100 sets “reach at 3” while displaying a decorative pattern as a mission effect. "Etc." Further, as a mission effect, a voice “Please reach at 3” may be output. Further, for example, when the process data for specific production at the time of probability change is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 puts a sentence such as “Let's reach at 7!” During the variation display of the decorative pattern as the mission production. In addition to superimposing display, a sound that is one octave higher than normal is output, and decorative pattern variation display is executed. Further, as a mission effect, a voice “Please reach at 7” may be output.

  As shown in FIG. 96, in this embodiment, the process of step S1844 shown in the first embodiment is not executed in the decorative symbol variation process. That is, it is not confirmed whether or not the common effect selection flag is set. Therefore, in this embodiment, the processing of steps S1850 to S1855 shown in the first embodiment is not executed. In FIG. 96, the processes in steps S1845 and S1846 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  If the current time has passed the specific effect change time in step S1846, effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step S1846A). If the high probability state flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the high-probability specific effect determination table as the specific effect determination table for determining the type of specific effect (step S1846B). . If the high probability state flag is not set, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the normal effect determination table as a specific effect determination table for determining the type of the specific effect (step S1846C).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a specific production determination random number for determining the type of the specific production, the extracted specific production determination random number, and the specific production determination table selected in steps S1846B and S1846C. Based on this, the type of specific effect is determined (step S1846D).

  Next, when it is decided not to perform the variation display of the decorative pattern due to the specific effect at the time of certain change (that is, when it is determined to perform the variation display of the decorative pattern due to the specific effect at the normal time) (N of step S1846E), The effect control microcomputer 100 switches to the process data for the specific effect at the normal time (step S1846F). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a specific production change flag indicating that it has been decided to perform the variable display of the decorative symbol by the specific production (step S1846H), and proceeds to step S1856.

  When it is decided to display the decorative symbols in a specific effect at the time of certain change (Y in step S1846E), the effect control microcomputer 100 switches to process data for specific effect at the time of certain change (step S1846G). . Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a specific production change flag indicating that it has been decided to perform the variable display of the decorative symbol by the specific production (step S1846H), and proceeds to step S1856.

  In FIG. 96, the processes in steps S1856 to S1860 are the same as those described in the first embodiment. For example, when the production control microcomputer 100 selects the process data for specific production at the normal time, the production control microcomputer 100 sets “reach at 3” while displaying a decorative pattern as a mission effect. "Etc." Further, as a mission effect, a voice “Please reach at 3” may be output. Further, for example, when the process data for specific production at the time of probability change is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 puts a sentence such as “Let's reach at 7!” During the variation display of the decorative pattern as the mission production. In addition to superimposing display, a sound that is one octave higher than normal is output, and decorative pattern variation display is executed. Further, as a mission effect, a voice “Please reach at 7” may be output.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stopping process (step S803) in the second embodiment. In FIG. 97, the processes in steps S1870 to S1878 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97, when the jackpot display symbol is not displayed in step S1871 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed: N in step S1872), the production control microcomputer 100 is the first control. Without executing the processing of steps S1879 to S1888 shown in the embodiment, the process directly proceeds to step S1889.

  In step S1889, the production control microcomputer 100 resets a predetermined flag (for example, a specific production change flag) (step S1889), and the value of the production control process flag corresponds to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). The updated value is updated (step S1890).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 satisfies the predetermined condition of the time measurement result by the real-time clock 381 (the current time is the specific production). Based on the fact that the change time has passed), the effect mode of the decorative pattern variation display is changed to the variation display by the specific effect. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability / low base state). In addition, when the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner, the effect control microcomputer 100 cannot recognize whether or not the gaming state is a probable variation state (in a normal decorative symbol variable display manner). It is configured to be able to execute a variable display of decorative symbols. Then, when the display control microcomputer 100 is executing the normal display of the decorative symbols, the normal-time specific effect is higher at a higher rate than when the game state is in the normal state when the game state is in the probable state. Change to a specific effect at the time of probability change different from. For this reason, as in the first embodiment, the display of the decorative symbols is changed to a mode according to the internal state of the gaming machine without being limited to the improvement of the performance effect simply by switching the performance mode based on the period. Can be executed, and the effect of the game and the interest for the player can be further improved. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, even if a specific effect at the time of probability change is executed, only the expectation to the probability change state is notified, and the specific effect completely corresponding to the internal state Is not executed, it is possible to give the player an interest in not knowing which state (probability or normal state) is known.

  In the configuration shown in this embodiment as well, the specific effect change screen is displayed when the current time has passed the specific effect change time (or similar to the example shown in FIGS. 91 and 92) (or The player may be prompted to operate the operation buttons 81a to 81e. Alternatively, the specific effect change screen may be displayed (or superimposed) immediately before the specific effect change time (for example, 10 seconds before) to prompt the player to operate the operation buttons 81a to 81e. Then, on the condition that the operation signals are input from the operation buttons 81a to 81e, the decorative symbol variation display may be changed to the variation display by the specific effect. If comprised in that way, unless the operation buttons 81a-81e are operated, the fluctuation | variation display by the specific effect corresponding to an internal state will not be performed, and a player's willingness to participate in a game can be improved.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, there are three cases where the display results of the decorative symbol variation display are the probable big hit, the normal big hit, and the outlier, but in addition to these, the decorative symbol variation display You may be made to display a probability big hit or a small hit suddenly as a display result. In this case, after suddenly changing the probable big hit gaming state or the small hit state, the variable display by the common effect is executed until the predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of the variable display is ended, or the normal fluctuation display is executed. You may do it. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the common effect execution flag (see step S3982) and sets a predetermined value in the common effect number counter when the sudden probability change big hit gaming state or the small hit state ends (see step S3982). Thus, even after suddenly changing big hit or small hit, the change display by the common effect may be executed. Then, when a predetermined specific effect change time elapses (see steps S822 and S1846), the decorative symbol variation display by the specific effect may be executed (see steps S823 to S824B and S1847 to S1848B).

  Further, in each of the embodiments described above, when a specific effect is performed based on the time measurement result of the real-time clock 381, the following simultaneous effects are performed at a game store where a plurality of gaming machines are installed. .

  FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the gaming store. As shown in FIG. 98, in the gaming store, the gaming machines 1 are installed side by side on the gaming machine installation island 500. Note that FIG. 98 corresponds to a view of the inside of the game store viewed from a passage on the side orthogonal to each gaming machine installation island 500.

  FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an aspect in the case where a specific effect is simultaneously produced in a plurality of gaming machines 1 installed in the game store. In FIG. 99, time changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3). First, as shown in FIG. 99 (1), when each gaming machine 1 in the game store is determined to be a big hit (including suddenly probable big hit) or a small hit, a decorative pattern indicating that it is a big hit or a small hit. The stop symbol of is derived and displayed. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (1), each gaming machine 1 displays a stop symbol of a decorative symbol without distinguishing whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit, and plays a sound or a lamp. By performing the effect used, it is not apparent whether it is a promising big hit or a normal big hit. In addition, each gaming machine 1 displays a stop symbol of a decorative symbol without distinguishing whether it is a sudden probability big hit or a small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. By performing the effect used, it is not apparent whether it is a sudden big hit or a small hit. In addition, by deriving and displaying a decorative symbol stop pattern without distinguishing all probability variation big hits, normal big hits, sudden probability variation big hits, and small hits, and using sound and lamps to produce, You may not know whether it is a big hit, suddenly probable big hit or all of a small hit.

  When the big hit game (including suddenly probable big hit) or the small hit game is finished, each gaming machine 1 displays a decoration with a common effect until the fluctuation display for a predetermined number of fluctuations is finished as shown in FIG. 99 (2). Executes variable display of symbols. By doing so, it is not possible to know whether the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a normal state for a certain period after the big hit game (including sudden probability change big hit) or the small hit game is finished. In addition, after ending a big hit game (including sudden chance change big hit) or a small hit game, if you do not want to be notified at all whether the game state is a probable change state or a normal state, After the big hit (including the big hit) or the small hit game is finished, the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the normal time may be displayed regardless of whether the game state is the probability change state or the normal state.

  Next, when each gaming machine 1 determines that a predetermined specific effect change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 99 (3), the game machines 1 start to execute the specific effect all at once. In this case, each gaming machine 1 starts execution of the specific effect by accurately determining whether or not a predetermined specific effect change time has elapsed based on the time measurement result of the real-time clock 381, and therefore, a plurality of game machines 1 set in the game store. It is possible to start the execution of specific effects all at once.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 99 (3), for example, in the gaming machine 1 in which the gaming state is the normal state, when the normal specific effect is started, the reach effect “3” is displayed as the mission effect during the decorative symbol variation display. Display text such as “Kakero!”. In addition, for example, in the gaming machine 1 in which the gaming state is in a probable state, when the specific effect at the time of probability change is started, a sentence such as “Let's reach at 7!” Is superimposed and displayed as a mission effect during the display of the decorative symbol variation. At the same time, it outputs a sound that is one octave higher than the specific performance during normal times. For example, in the gaming machine 1 that executes the specific effect at the time of the probability change, the internal state is informed by the flashing of the lamp and outputting a stuttering sound compared to the gaming machine 1 that executes the specific effect at the normal time. To do.

  In addition, when performing a simultaneous production in an amusement store, for example, it is set so that a specific production change time comes regularly (for example, a specific production change time is set to arrive every two hours). So that chances of notifying the probability change regularly fall out. By doing so, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation in the probabilistic state and prevent the player from quitting the game immediately after the big hit, suddenly probable big hit, or small hit. It is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  When performing the simultaneous effects shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, each gaming machine 1 outputs an effect sound corresponding to the mission effect. In this case, as described above, when each gaming machine 1 performs a simultaneous effect by a mission effect corresponding to a specific effect at the time of probability change, it is more than when performing a simultaneous effect by a mission effect corresponding to a specific effect at a normal time. A production sound that is one octave higher is output. Further, for example, each gaming machine 1 may output a fluctuating sound corresponding to the fluctuating pattern. Further, when performing a simultaneous effect by a mission effect as a specific effect, a so-called super reach type of reach effect is presented to the player as the mission effect (for example, a sentence “Please apply Super Reach A!” Is displayed. Etc.).

  Moreover, when performing simultaneous production, each game machine 1 performs lamp control according to mission production. Further, for example, each gaming machine 1 may perform lamp control corresponding to the variation pattern. In this case, when each gaming machine 1 performs the mission effect corresponding to the specific effect at the time of probability change as a simultaneous effect, a different light emission pattern or luminance is different from when performing the mission effect corresponding to the normal specific effect as a simultaneous effect. Each lamp may be caused to emit light. Also, when using a multi-color LED, etc., when performing a mission effect corresponding to a specific effect at the time of a certain change in a simultaneous effect, a different emission color is used when performing a mission effect corresponding to a specific effect during a normal time. Each lamp may emit light.

  Further, when performing a mission effect in a specific effect, it may be determined whether or not to end the mission effect by lottery after the mission effect is started. In this case, the mission effect may be finished with a low probability when the gaming state is a probabilistic state, and the mission effect may be finished with a high probability when the gaming state is a normal state. By doing so, it is possible to confirm whether there is a possibility that the internal state is in the probabilistic state only after the decorative symbol variation display is started. Therefore, during the execution of the mission effect, the player can be interested in whether the internal state is a probable state for the gaming machine other than the one that the player is playing, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is improved. Can be made.

  In addition, when performing a simultaneous production, the specific production in the same mode is not performed every time based on the arrival of a predetermined specific production change time, but the contents of the simultaneous production are changed according to the day of the week, day, month, etc. May be. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 of each gaming machine 1 reads a date signal (year, month, day, day of the week) from the real-time clock 381, and based on the read date signal, a specific day of the week, day, month Then, the arrival interval of the specific effect change time may be changed, or the effect content of the specific effect to be executed may be changed. For example, based on the date signal read from the real-time clock 381, after the introduction of the gaming machine 1, the specific effect change time arrives every hour for the first week, and the specific effect changes every 30 minutes for the second week. You may change an arrival interval so that time may arrive.

  As described above, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the common effect (in the first embodiment, whether it is in the state of probability variation or the normal state internally, after the big hit ends) Second Embodiment An effect that is executed for a predetermined period (a predetermined number of fluctuations), and that gives an expectation as to whether or not the internal state is a probabilistic state, but does not fully inform whether or not it is probable. Then, when the timed result of the real-time clock 381 becomes the specific effect change time during execution of the normal effect, the mission effect as the specific effect (the achievement condition (for example, “7 reach!” To the player!) Etc. are presented over a predetermined period (for example, multiple fluctuations (for example, 5 times) or time (for example, 3 minutes)), and the jackpot variable display is executed in the variable display executed while the achievement condition is presented. To change the game effect as a simultaneous effect to the game effect that executes the variable display so that the achievement condition is satisfied and the variable display is controlled so that the achievement condition is not satisfied if the achievement condition is off However, the contents are as follows: (1) A game effect regardless of whether or not it is in a probable state internally when the timed result of the real-time clock 381 reaches the specific effect change time during execution of the common effect. Is changed to a specific effect as a simultaneous effect, and if it is internally in a probable state, it is changed to a specific effect at the time of a probable change that is different from the normal specific effect that is executed when it is in the normal state internally as a specific effect. (2) When a common performance is being executed, when the timekeeping result of the real-time clock 381 reaches a specific performance change time, In the case where the game effect is changed, the game effect is changed to the specific effect at the time of the probability change as the specific effect (or the rate of change is high) on the condition that the game effect is internally changed without change. The embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the contents described above.

  For example, although the mission effect is executed as the specific effect, the mission effect may be executed only by sound without executing the mission effect. In that case, regardless of the variable display to be executed, the sound data corresponding to the simultaneous effect is output repeatedly, and the sound corresponding to the simultaneous effect is output regardless of the start and end of the variable display. In the case where a sound is selected for each variable display, different sounds may be output as a sound corresponding to the variable display during the simultaneous production and the common production. In any case, different sounds may be output as compared to the case where the sound is not internally changed, such as when the sound is one octave higher if the sound is internally changed during execution of the simultaneous performance.

  Moreover, you may make it perform simultaneous production only with a lamp (LED). In that case, regardless of the variable display to be executed, the lamp control data corresponding to the simultaneous effect is repeatedly used as the light emission control of the lamp corresponding to the simultaneous effect, so that the simultaneous effect is possible regardless of the start and end of the variable display. The lamp may be controlled with a light emission mode corresponding to the above, and when the light emission mode of the lamp is selected for each variable display, it is variable by controlling the lamp with a different light emission mode during the simultaneous production and the common production. The lamp control corresponding to the display may be executed.

  In any case, when the performance is being performed at the same time, if it is in an internally probable state, the light emission pattern (flashing speed, etc.), emission color, and light emission brightness are different. The lamp may be controlled with It should be noted that a simultaneous effect may be executed by any one of the effect display, sound, and lamp (LED), or the effect display may be executed by a plurality of combinations of effect display, sound, and lamp (LED). For example, when a mission effect and sound or lamp are combined, the sound or lamp control corresponding to the mission effect may be executed as the sound or lamp control corresponding to the simultaneous effect. Also, in the case of an example in which a specific effect is executed only when it is in a probabilistic state internally or when a certain condition is satisfied, when the specific effect is not executed, the common effect is executed without executing the simultaneous effect. You can do it.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of each of the above embodiments can be given a predetermined game value to a player mainly when the special symbol that is variably displayed on the variable display unit based on the start winning prize becomes the predetermined symbol. A pachinko machine that can be given a predetermined gaming value to a player when there is a prize in a predetermined area of an electric game that is released based on a start prize, or a start prize The present invention is applied even to a pachinko game machine in which a predetermined right is generated or continued when there is a prize for a predetermined electric combination that is released when the stop symbol of the symbol variably displayed becomes a predetermined symbol combination. it can. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine that inserts game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game, or a game machine that inserts game balls instead of game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game.

  In addition, in each embodiment shown above, the characteristic structure of the gaming machine as shown in the following (1) to (6) is also shown.

(1) A variable display device (for example, a variable display device 9) that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) that can be identified and derives and displays a display result is specified. When a display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, the game is shifted to a specific gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a predetermined transition condition is established (for example, with a promising big hit by lottery) A game in which the display result of the variable display of the identification information is likely to become the specific display result (for example, the probability change state) after the specific game state ends when it is determined) A clocking means (for example, a real-time clock 381) for performing a clocking operation so that at least one of day and time can be specified, The game effect execution means for executing (for example, the portion of steps S839 to S842, S1836 to S1839, S1857 to S1860 in the effect control microcomputer 100) and the time measurement result by the time measurement means satisfy a predetermined condition (for example, Based on the fact that the game effect executed by the game effect execution means is changed to a game effect (for example, a specific effect) of a predetermined effect mode (for example, an effect) Steps S824A, S824B, S1848A and S1848B in the control microcomputer 100) and gaming state determination means (for example, effect control) for determining whether or not the gaming state is a special gaming state (for example, a probability variation state). In the microcomputer 100 Steps S823 and S1847 are executed), and the game effect execution means is a game effect (for example, a common effect. Specifically, it is a rendition that cannot recognize whether the game state is a special game state or not. From the end of the big hit game, until the end of the variable display for a predetermined number of times, in the effect corresponding to the variable display by the common effect (for example, using yellow as the background color) (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 can perform steps S839 to S842 based on the common production process data selected in steps S826 and S832.) Steps S1836 to S1839 are executed, and step S is performed based on the common effect process data selected in step S1854. 1857 to S1860), and the effect state changing means is the game state when the game effect is being executed in the effect aspect incapable of recognizing whether or not the game state is the special game state. The game effect executed by the game effect execution means is determined from the predetermined effect modes on condition that the determination means determines that the game state is not the special game state (for example, it is determined as N in steps S823 and S1847). A game effect in the first effect mode (for example, a specific effect during normal times). Specifically, during the decorative display of the change of the decorative pattern, it is possible to change the display so that text such as “Let's reach at 3!” Is superimposed and only “Speech at 3” is output as the mission effect. On the condition that the gaming state is determined to be the special gaming state by the gaming state determination means (for example, it is determined as Y in steps S823 and S1847), the gaming effect executed by the gaming effect execution means is a predetermined effect mode. The game effect of the second effect mode (for example, the specific effect at the time of probability change. Specifically, while displaying the variation of the decorative symbol, the text such as “Let's reach at 7!” Is superimposed and displayed at the normal time. (For example, a production control microphone that outputs a sound that is one octave higher than the production, or outputs only the voice “Please reach at 7” as the mission production) If the computer 100 determines Y in step S822 and N in step S823, the computer 100 executes step S824A, determines Y in step S1846 and N in step S1847, and executes step S1848A. And step S824B is executed if it is determined to be Y in step S823, and step S1848B is executed if it is determined that Y is determined in step S1847 and Y is determined in step S1847.
According to such a configuration, the effect mode changing means for changing the game effect executed by the game effect executing means to the game effect of the predetermined effect mode based on the fact that the time measurement result by the time measuring means satisfies the predetermined condition; And a game state determination means for determining whether or not the game state is a special game state, and the game effect execution means provides a game effect in an effect mode in which it is impossible to recognize whether or not the game state is a special game state. When the game effect is executed in an effect mode that is executable and the effect mode changing means cannot recognize whether or not the game state is the special game state by the game effect executing means, On the condition that the state is determined not to be the special game state, the game effect executed by the game effect execution means is changed to the game effect of the first effect mode among the predetermined effect modes, and the game state determination The game effect executed by the game effect execution means is changed to the game effect of the second effect mode among the predetermined effect modes, provided that the game state is determined to be the special game state by the stage. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode according to the internal state of the gaming machine and execute the game mode effect mode without simply improving the performance effect by switching the mode based on the period. It is possible to further improve the production effect and the interest for the player.

(2) The gaming machine includes an operation unit (for example, operation buttons 81a to 81e) that outputs an operation signal in accordance with a player's operation, and the effect mode changing unit inputs the operation signal from the operation unit (for example, The game effect executed by the game effect execution means is changed to a game effect of the second effect mode (for example, a decorative pattern change display by a specific effect at the time of probability change) on the condition that it is determined as Y in steps S823B and S1847B) ( For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step S824B if determined as Y in step S823B, and execute step S1848B if determined as Y in step S1847B.
According to such a configuration, the effect mode changing means is configured to change the game effect executed by the game effect executing means to the game effect of the second effect mode on condition that the operation signal is input from the operation means. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

(3) A variable display device (for example, the variable display device 9) that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) that can be identified and displays and displays the display result is specified. When a display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, the game is shifted to a specific gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a predetermined transition condition is established (for example, with a promising big hit by lottery) A game in which the display result of the variable display of the identification information is likely to become the specific display result (for example, the probability change state) after the specific game state ends when it is determined) A clocking means (for example, a real-time clock 381) for performing a clocking operation so that at least one of day and time can be specified, The game effect execution means for executing (for example, the portion of steps S839 to S842, S1836 to S1839, S1857 to S1860 in the effect control microcomputer 100) and the time measurement result by the time measurement means satisfy a predetermined condition (for example, Based on the fact that the game effect executed by the game effect execution means is changed to a game effect (for example, a specific effect) of a predetermined effect mode (for example, an effect) Steps SS824B and S1848B in the control microcomputer 100) and game state determination means for determining whether or not the game state is a special game state (for example, a probability change state) (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100). Steps S823 and S18 in 7), and the game effect execution means is a game effect (for example, a common effect. More specifically, a big hit game is played in an effect mode in which it is impossible to recognize whether the game state is a special game state or not. Whether the display is in a state corresponding to the variable display by the common effect (for example, using yellow as the background color) or whether it is in the normal state or the normal state until the end of the variable display for a predetermined number of times. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 can perform steps S839 to S842, S1836 to S1839 based on the common production process data selected in steps S826 and S832.) And execute steps S1857 to S1860 based on the common effect process data selected in step S1854. And the effect state changing means, when the game effect is executed in the effect mode in which it is impossible to recognize whether or not the game state is the special game state by the game effect executing means. On the condition that the state is determined to be the special gaming state (for example, it is determined to be Y in steps S823 and S1847), the game effect executed by the game effect executing means is a game effect (for example, probability change). When specific production. Specifically, while displaying a variation of the decorative pattern, a sentence such as “Let's reach at 7!” Is superimposed and output a sound one octave higher than the specific effect during normal times, or “7 (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 determines Y in step S822 and Y in step S823, and executes step S824B.) A game machine characterized in that if it is determined as Y and if it is determined as Y in step S1847, step S1848B is executed).
According to such a configuration, the effect mode changing means for changing the game effect executed by the game effect executing means to the game effect of the predetermined effect mode based on the fact that the time measurement result by the time measuring means satisfies the predetermined condition; And a game state determination means for determining whether or not the game state is a special game state, and the game effect execution means provides a game effect in an effect mode in which it is impossible to recognize whether or not the game state is a special game state. When the game effect is executed in an effect mode that is executable and the effect mode changing means cannot recognize whether or not the game state is the special game state by the game effect executing means, Since the game effect executed by the game effect execution means is changed to a game effect of a predetermined effect mode on condition that the state is determined to be the special game state, the period is simply It is possible to change the aspect according to the internal state of the gaming machine and execute the effect aspect of the game effect without limiting the effect effect by switching the effect aspect based on the effect effect in the game and the player The interest can be improved.

(4) The gaming machine uses specific condition determining means for determining whether or not the time measured by the time measuring means satisfies a specific condition that arrives before a predetermined condition arrives (for example, step S829 in the production control microcomputer 100, A portion in which S1851 is executed) and the specific condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied (for example, it is determined as Y in steps S829 and S1851), the game effect is executed in the special game state. An unrecognizable effect start means (for example, selected in step S832 in the effect control microcomputer 100) that starts execution of a game effect (for example, a decorative pattern variation display by a common effect) in an unrecognizable effect mode. A portion for executing steps S839 to S842 based on the common effect process data. It may be configured to include a part) and which on the basis of the common effect for process data switched flop S1854 executes Step S1857～S1860.
According to such a configuration, when the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determination unit that determines whether or not the timing result by the timing unit satisfies the specific condition that arrives before the predetermined condition arrives, and the specific condition determination unit When determined, the game effect execution means is provided with unrecognizable effect start means for starting execution of the game effect in an effect mode in which it is impossible to recognize whether or not the game state is the special game state. Therefore, even if the game effect is normal, the effect mode change means can switch the effect mode of the game effect according to the internal state of the gaming machine, Interest can be improved.

(5) The gaming machine can use a game medium (for example, a game ball) to allow a player to play a predetermined game, and that a payout condition has been established (for example, each winning entry 29, 30, 33, 39, an electronic component (for example, a lamp or a speaker) used for paying out a game medium to the player based on the fact that a game ball has won the big prize opening and giving a predetermined notification (for example, error notification). A game control board (for example, main board 31) on which game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for executing a game control process for controlling the progress of the game is mounted, and a game medium A payout means (for example, a ball payout device 97) and a payout control means (for example, a payout control microcomputer 370) for executing a payout control process for controlling the payout means. A payout control board (for example, the payout control board 37) and an effect control board (for example, the effect control board 80) on which effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) for controlling the electrical components is mounted; On the payout control board, state detection signals (for example, data of bits 0 to 4 of the input port 1 shown in FIG. 12) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of information related to the state of the gaming machine including an error state related to the payout of the game medium State notification means for outputting to the game control board (for example, a part for executing input determination processing in the payout control microcomputer 370 (see FIG. 52) and an output circuit 373B) are provided, and a plurality of types relating to the state of the gaming machine The state detection signal corresponding to each of the information of the input port portion (temporarily accessible on the game control board ( For example, it is input to the input port 1) shown in FIG. 12, and the game control means determines whether any one or more of the plurality of state detection signals input to the input port portion have changed. State detection signal determination means (for example, a part for executing the processing of steps S582 and S583 (see FIG. 38) in the game control microcomputer 560) and the state detection signal determination means are any one of a plurality of state detection signals. When it is determined that two or more states have changed, input port data transmission means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) that collectively transmits a plurality of state detection signal states input to the input port unit as commands. In steps S584 to S586 and S591 to S593 (see FIG. 38 and FIG. 39)) The control means is input port data determination means for determining which state of a plurality of types of information related to the state of the gaming machine has changed based on the command transmitted by the input port data transmission means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100). In step S611, S651 to S653, S655, S656, S658, S660, S662, S664, S671, S673, and S676) and the information regarding the state of the gaming machine determined by the input port data determination means It may be configured to include notification control means for causing the electrical component to perform notification (for example, a part (see FIG. 75) that executes notification start processing and notification processing in the production control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, the state detection signal corresponding to each of the plurality of types of information regarding the state of the gaming machine is input to the input port unit that is accessible at a time on the gaming control board, and the gaming control means Determines whether any one or more states of the plurality of state detection signals input to the input port portion have changed, and determines that any one or more states have changed, The state of a plurality of state detection signals input to the input port part is transmitted as a command in a lump, and the effect control means changes any state of a plurality of types of information related to the state of the gaming machine based on the received command. Since the electronic component is configured to notify the electrical component corresponding to the information related to the determined gaming machine state, each of the plurality of types of information relating to the gaming machine state is distinguished. Together will be able to broadcast Te, it is possible to not increase the control load information determination game control means in such a case. In addition, since the plurality of state detection signals are transmitted from the game control board on condition that any one or more of the plurality of state detection signals input to the input port unit have changed, the game control board It is difficult to grasp the control state of the game control means based on the signal transmitted from the player, and as a result, there is a high possibility that fraud can be prevented.

(6) The gaming machine is based on a game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game and a command (for example, an effect control command) transmitted by the game control means via the command line. When there is an effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) for controlling the effect device, the effect control means is connected to a predetermined external device (for example, the real-time clock setting device 500) on the command line. In addition, based on an external command (for example, the setting command shown in FIG. 60) input from the external device via the command line, the reference data setting means (for example, for effect control) that sets the reference data used by the timing means for the timing operation. (The part which performs step S613A, S613B in the microcomputer 100) It may be configured to include.
According to such a configuration, when the predetermined control device is connected to the command line, the production control device performs the time measuring operation based on the external command input from the external device via the command line. Since the reference data setting means for setting the reference data to be used is included, it is possible to reset the time when there is a deviation in the time measuring operation of the time measuring means. For example, when performing presentations with a plurality of gaming machines at the same time based on the time measured by the timing means, the timing of the presentation of the plurality of gaming machines is shifted while ensuring the versatility of each board mounted on the gaming machine. Can be prevented.

  The present invention includes a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other and derives and displays a display result, and is advantageous for a player when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device. A special display state where the display result of the variable display of the identification information is likely to be the specific display result compared to the normal state after the specific game state ends when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. It is applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that is shifted to a gaming state.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Special symbol display 9 Variable display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 20 Special variable winning ball apparatus 31 Game control board (main board)
37 Dispensing control board 48 Full switch 56 CPU
51a Left award ball lamp 51b Right award ball lamp 187 Discharge number count switch 301 Out of ball switch 370 Discharge control microcomputer 560 Game control microcomputer 78 Serial output circuit 80 Production control board 81a-81e Operation buttons 82a-82d Dish lamp ( LED)
83 Operation button lamp (LED)
100 effect control microcomputer 101 effect control CPU
125a-125f Center decoration lamp (LED)
126a-126f Stage lamp (LED)
281a-281l Ceiling lamp (LED)
282a-282e Left frame lamp (LED)
283a-283e Right frame lamp (LED)
381 Real-time clock 382 Backup RAM
383 Backup power supply circuit

Claims (1)

A game frame installed to be openable and closable with respect to an outer frame, and a game board that is attached to the game frame and includes a predetermined plate-like body and various components attached to the plate-like body. A possible gaming machine,
A time measuring means for performing a time measuring operation so that at least one of date and time can be specified;
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting an effect control command for controlling the electric parts for the effect,
Effect control means for controlling electric parts for effect in response to the effect control command transmitted by the game control means,
The game control means and the effect control means are mounted on the game board,
The game control means includes command transmission means for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control means,
The production control means includes
Based on the effect control command received from the game control means, an output means for outputting a control signal for controlling the electrical parts for the effect in a serial signal system;
Game effect execution means for executing a game effect using the electric parts for the effect,
Effect mode changing means for changing the game effect executed by the game effect execution means to a game effect of a predetermined effect mode based on the fact that the time measurement result by the time measuring means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit provided in the game board and a plurality of frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuits provided in the game frame;
The board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit converts the control signal input from the output means of the performance control means from a serial signal system to a parallel signal system, and is provided in the game board among the electrical components for the performance. Output to the electrical component
The plurality of frame side serial-parallel conversion circuits convert the control signal input from the output means of the effect control means from a serial signal method to a parallel signal method, and the game frame of the effect electric parts. Output to the electrical components provided in
The board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the plurality of frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuits, or the effect control means and the plurality of frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuits are connected via one system wiring,
A game frame side relay board for relaying connection between the plurality of frame side serial-parallel conversion circuits and the effect control means is provided in the game frame,
The signal line of the control signal to the plurality of frame side serial-parallel conversion circuits output by the output means in a serial signal system is detachably connected to the game frame side relay board using one connector. A gaming machine characterized by

Images